You are on page 1of 356

Operators Manual

M-Class
0CtA9
1635843396
Order No. 6515 4237 13 Part No. 163 584 33 96 USA Edition A 2005
ML 350
ML 500
Our company and staff congratulate you Please read this manual carefully,
on the purchase of your new then return it to your vehicle where it
Mercedes-Benz. will be handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demon- Please follow the recommendations
stration of your trust in our company contained in this manual. They are de-
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your de- signed to acquaint you with the opera-
sire to own an automobile that will be as tion of your Mercedes-Benz.
easy as possible to operate and provide
Please pay attention to the warnings
years of service.
and cautions contained in this manual.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef- They are designed to help improve the
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts- safety of the vehicle operator and oc-
men. To help assure your driving pleasure, cupants.
and also the safety of you and your passen- We extend our best wishes for many miles
gers, we ask you to make a small invest- of safe, pleasurable driving.
ment of time:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents

Parking and locking.............................. 54


Introduction .......................................... 9 At a glance .......................................... 21 Parking brake ................................. 54
Product information................................ 9 Cockpit................................................. 22 Switching off headlamps................. 55
Operators Manual ............................... 10 Instrument cluster ................................ 24 Turning off engine........................... 55
Service and warranty information .. 10 Center console ..................................... 27 Locking ........................................... 56
Important notice for California Upper part ...................................... 27
retail buyers and lessees of Lower part ...................................... 28
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11 Overhead control panel ........................ 29 Safety and Security ........................... 57
Maintenance .................................. 12 Occupant safety ................................... 58
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12 Airbags ........................................... 59
Change of address or ownership.... 13 Getting started ................................... 31 Seat belts ....................................... 64
Operating your vehicle outside Unlocking ............................................. 32 Children in the vehicle .................... 67
the USA or Canada......................... 13 Remote control with folding key ..... 32 Blocking of rear door
Where to find it.................................... 15 Adjusting .............................................. 35 window operation ........................... 74
Symbols............................................... 16 Seats............................................... 35 Panic alarm .......................................... 75
Operating safety .................................. 17 Steering wheel ................................ 40 Activating........................................ 75
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 17 Mirrors ............................................ 41 Deactivating.................................... 75
Problems with your vehicle.................. 18 Driving .................................................. 43 Driving safety systems ......................... 76
Reporting safety defects...................... 19 Fastening the seat belts.................. 43 ABS................................................. 76
Reporting safety defects ................ 19 Starting the engine ......................... 47 BAS................................................. 78
Vehicle data recording......................... 20 Switching on headlamps ................. 50 4-ETS .............................................. 79
Information regarding Turn signals and high beam ............ 50 EBP ................................................. 80
electronic Windshield wipers........................... 51 ESP ................................................. 80
recording devices........................... 20 Rear window wiper/washer ........... 52
Problems while driving.................... 53
Contents

Anti-theft systems................................ 83 Seats ................................................... 95 Automatic transmission..................... 120


Immobilizer..................................... 83 Removing and installing One-touch gearshifting ................ 121
Anti-theft alarm system .................. 83 front seat head restraints............... 95 Gear ranges ................................. 122
Tow-away alarm, Rear seat head restraints ............... 96 Gear selector lever position ......... 123
glass breakage sensor.................... 84 Heated seats* ................................ 98 Driving tips................................... 124
Rear seats ...................................... 99 Towing a trailer ............................ 125
Third row seats* .......................... 102 Emergency operation
Controls in detail ............................... 87 Memory function* ............................. 105 (Limp Home Mode) ...................... 126
Locking and unlocking ......................... 88 Storing positions into memory ..... 106 Transmission control
Remote control with folding key..... 88 Recalling positions LOW RANGE mode ............................ 127
Opening the doors from memory ............................... 106 Switching on LOW RANGE mode.. 127
from the inside ............................... 90 Storing exterior rear Switching off LOW RANGE mode . 127
Opening the liftgate........................ 91 view mirror parking position......... 106 Good visibility .................................... 128
Closing the liftgate ......................... 92 Lighting.............................................. 107 Rear view mirrors......................... 128
Automatic central locking .............. 93 Combination switch ..................... 107 Electrically folding
Locking and unlocking Fog lamps .................................... 111 exterior rear view mirrors............. 130
from the inside ............................... 94 Hazard warning flasher ................ 113 Windshield wipers ........................ 131
Interior lighting............................. 114 Headlamp cleaning system* ........ 133
Instrument cluster ............................. 117 Rear window wiper....................... 133
Instrument cluster illumination .... 117 Sun visors .................................... 134
Coolant temperature gauge ......... 118 Rear window defroster................. 135
Display in the speedometer ......... 118
Resetting trip odometer ............... 119
Tachometer.................................. 119
Outside temperature indicator ..... 119
Setting the clock .......................... 119
Contents

Automatic climate control ................. 136 Driving systems .................................. 153


Automatic mode........................... 139 Cruise control ............................... 153 Operation.......................................... 195
Adjusting air volume and Parktronic* system The first 1000 miles (1500 km).......... 196
air distribution manually............... 139 (Parking assist) ............................. 156 Driving instructions ............................ 197
Defrosting .................................... 140 Loading............................................... 160 Drive sensibly save fuel ............. 197
Air recirculation mode.................. 140 Loading instructions ..................... 160 Drinking and driving...................... 197
Air conditioning............................ 141 Partition net* ................................ 162 Pedals........................................... 197
Residual heat and ventilation ....... 142 Cargo compartment cover blind* . 164 Power assistance.......................... 197
Rear passenger compartment Cargo floor plates ......................... 165 Brakes .......................................... 198
ventilation and rear Roof rack* .................................... 166 Driving off ..................................... 199
automatic climate control ............ 143 Useful features ................................... 167 Parking ......................................... 200
Front and rear air vents................ 144 Storage compartments ................. 167 Tires.............................................. 200
Power windows.................................. 146 Cup holders .................................. 169 Hydroplaning ................................ 201
Opening and closing Armrest in rear seat bench ........... 170 Tire traction .................................. 201
the side windows ......................... 146 Ashtrays and cigarette lighter....... 171 Tire speed rating........................... 202
Synchronizing power windows ..... 148 Electrical outlet............................. 173 Winter driving instructions............ 202
Rear quarter windows* ................ 148 Telephone* ................................... 173 Standing water ............................. 204
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* ............... 150 Tele Aid*....................................... 174 Off-road driving............................. 204
Opening and closing the Garage door opener...................... 183 Trailer towing................................ 211
power tilt/sliding sunroof............ 150 Trip computer* ............................. 189 Passenger compartment............... 215
Synchronizing the Driving abroad .............................. 216
power tilt/sliding sunroof............ 152 Control and operation
of radio transmitters..................... 216
Catalytic converter ....................... 217
Emission control ........................... 217
Coolant temperature .................... 218
Contents

At the gas station............................... 219 Maintenance...................................... 237 Unlocking/locking in


Refueling ...................................... 219 Clearing the an emergency.................................... 268
Check regularly and maintenance service indicator ..... 237 Unlocking the vehicle................... 268
before a long trip.......................... 221 Maintenance service Locking the vehicle ...................... 269
Engine compartment.......................... 222 term exceeded ............................. 238 Fuel filler flap ............................... 269
Hood ............................................ 222 Calling up the Manually unlocking the
Engine oil...................................... 223 maintenance service indicator ..... 238 transmission gear selector lever .. 270
Transmission fluid level ................ 227 Resetting the Opening/closing in
Coolant level ................................ 227 maintenance service indicator ..... 238 an emergency.................................... 271
Battery ......................................... 228 Vehicle care....................................... 240 Power tilt/sliding sunroof* ......... 271
Windshield/rear Cleaning and care of the vehicle .. 240 Replacing key batteries ..................... 272
window washer system and Remote control ............................ 273
headlamp cleaning system*......... 230 Replacing bulbs ................................. 274
Tires and wheels ................................ 231 Practical hints.................................. 247 Bulbs............................................ 274
Important guidelines .................... 231 What to do if .................................. 248 Replacing bulbs for front lamps ... 276
Life of tire..................................... 232 Lamps in instrument cluster ........ 248 Replacing bulbs for rear lamps .... 279
Direction of rotation ..................... 232 Additional indicators Adjusting headlamp aim .............. 282
Checking tire inflation pressure ... 232 in the speedometer display .......... 263 Replacing wiper blades...................... 283
Rotating wheels............................ 233 Where will I find ...? ........................... 264 Removing ..................................... 283
Winter driving..................................... 235 First aid kit ................................... 264 Installing ...................................... 283
Winter tires................................... 235 Vehicle tool kit ............................. 264 Flat tire .............................................. 284
Block heater (Canada only) .......... 236 Spare wheel (space-saver tire) ..... 266 Mounting the spare wheel ........... 284
Snow chains ................................. 236
Contents

Battery............................................... 288 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc........... 312


Disconnecting the battery............ 289 Technical data .................................. 301 Capacities..................................... 312
Removing the battery................... 289 Parts service....................................... 302 Engine oils .................................... 314
Charging and Warranty coverage ............................. 303 Engine oil additives....................... 314
reinstalling the battery ................. 289 Loss of Service and Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant........... 314
Reconnecting the battery............. 289 Information Booklet ...................... 303 Brake fluid .................................... 314
Jump starting ..................................... 291 Identification labels ............................ 304 Premium unleaded gasoline.......... 315
Towing the vehicle ............................. 293 Layout of poly-V-belt drive.................. 305 Fuel requirements......................... 315
Front towing eye .......................... 295 Engine ................................................ 306 Gasoline additives......................... 315
Rear towing eye ........................... 295 Rims and tires .................................... 307 Coolants ....................................... 316
Stranded vehicle .......................... 296 Rims and tires............................... 307 Windshield washer and
Fuses ................................................. 297 Spare wheel .................................. 308 headlamp cleaning* system ......... 319
Aids for changing fuses................ 298 Electrical system ................................ 309 Windshield and headlamp
Main fuse box............................... 298 Main Dimensions................................ 310 washer fluid mixing ratio............... 319
Fuse box in Weights .............................................. 311 Consumer information........................ 320
front passenger footwell .............. 299 Uniform tire quality grading .......... 320

Technical terms ............................... 323

Index ................................................. 329


Introduction
Product information
Product information
Please observe the following in your own We are unable to make an assessment for Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as
best interest: other products and therefore cannot be conversion parts and accessories
held responsible for them, even if in indi- approved by us are available at your
We recommend using genuine
vidual cases an official approval or authori- authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
zation by governmental or other agencies Center where you will receive comprehen-
parts and accessories explicitly approved
should exist. Use of such parts and acces- sive information, also on permissible tech-
by us for your vehicle model.
sories could adversely affect the safety, nical modifications, and where proper
We have tested these parts to determine performance or reliability of your vehicle. installation will be performed.
their reliability, safety and special Please do not use them.
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

9
Introduction
Operators Manual

This Operators Manual contains a great We continuously strive to improve our Service and warranty information
deal of useful information. We urge you to product, and ask for your understanding
read it carefully and familiarize yourself that we reserve the right to make changes The Service and Warranty Information
with the vehicle before driving. in design and equipment. Therefore, infor- Booklet contains detailed information
mation, illustrations and descriptions in about the warranties covering your
For your own safety and longer service life
this Operators Manual might differ from Mercedes-Benz, including:
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
your vehicle. New Light Truck Limited Warranty,
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam- Optional equipment is also described in Emission System Warranty,
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you this manual, including operating instruc-
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail- tions wherever necessary. Since they are Emission Performance Warranty,
ure to follow instructions is not covered by special-order items, the descriptions and California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. illustrations herein may vary slightly from Vermont Emission Control System
the actual equipment of your vehicle. Warranty
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual. If there are any equipment details that are (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Therefore, you may find explanations for not shown or described in this Operators Vermont only),
optional equipment not installed in your Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz State Warranty Enforcement Laws
vehicle. If you have any questions about Light Truck Center will be glad to inform (Lemon Laws).
the operation of any equipment, your you of correct care and operating proce-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck dures.
Center will be glad to demonstrate the The Operators Manual and Maintenance
proper procedures. Booklet are important documents and
should be kept with the vehicle.

10
Introduction
Operators Manual

Important notice for California retail (1) the same substantial defect or mal- (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz function results in a condition that is of repair of the same or different sub-
automobiles likely to cause death or serious bodily stantial defects or malfunctions for a
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de- cumulative total of more than
Under California law you may be entitled to fect or malfunction has been subject to 30 calender days.
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund repair two or more times, and you have
Written notification should be sent to us,
of the purchase price or lease price, if directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
not a dealer, at Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au- LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
Customer Assistance Center,
thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
(2) the same substantial defect or mal- One Mercedes Drive, Montvale, NJ
one or more substantial defects or mal-
function of a less serious nature than 07645-0350.
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
category (1) has been subject to repair
its express warranty after a reasonable
four or more times and you have direct-
number of repair attempts. During the pe-
ly notified us in writing of the need for
riod of 18 months from original delivery of
its repair, or
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18 000 miles (approx. 29 000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair at-
tempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following oc-
curs:

11
Introduction
Operators Manual

Maintenance Roadside Assistance Additional charges may be applicable for a


breakdown location determined not to be a
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance reasonably accessible roadside location as
necessary maintenance work which should Program provides factory-trained technical determined by our authorized technician
be performed at regular intervals. help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to and tow service provider.
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with For additional information refer to the
you when you take the vehicle to your 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada) gram Brochure in your glove box.
Center for service. The service advisor will
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Cus-
record each service in the booklet for you.
tomer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Roadside Assistance will be provided in ac-
cordance with standard program guide-
lines which include providing service to the
vehicle up to a reasonable distance from a
paved roadway. We will make every effort
to assist in a breakdown situation, howev-
er, the accessibility of your vehicle will be
determined by our authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center techni-
cian or the tow service provider on a
case-by-case basis and may be a factor in
our ability to respond.

12
Introduction
Operators Manual

Change of address or ownership Operating your vehicle outside the USA


or Canada
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the Change of Address Notice If you plan to operate your vehicle in for-
found in the Service and Warranty Informa- eign countries, please be aware that:
tion Booklet, or simply call the
service facilities or replacement parts
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
may not be readily available,
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Ser- unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat-
vice (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in alytic converters may not be available;
your own interest that we can contact you the use of leaded fuels will damage the
should the need arise. catalysts,
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all gasoline may have a considerably low-
literature with the vehicle to make it avail- er octane rating, and improper fuel can
able to the next operator. cause engine damage.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the Notice of Purchase of Used
Truck found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.

13
Introduction
Operators Manual

Warning! G
This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for both on-road and off-road use. It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional 2-wheel drive
passenger cars are not intended. This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from conventional passenger cars in driving conditions which
may occur on streets, highways and off-road use.
This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars. As with other vehicles of this type, if you
make sharp turns at excessive speeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle may roll over or may go out of control and crash. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
and severe or fatal injury.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Operators Manual. Take time to become familiar with the driving characteristics of this vehicle. Be
sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Do not attempt sharp turns at excessive
speeds or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. When driving off-road or working the vehicle
hard, do not overload it. And, always wear your seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a seat belt.

14
Introduction
Where to find it
Where to find it
This Operators Manual is designed to pro-
vide comprehensive support information Controls in detail Technical data
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section Here you will find detailed information All important technical data for your vehi-
has its own reference color so you can find about the equipment installed on your ve- cle can be found in this section.
information quickly. hicle. This section expands on the Getting
started section and also describes techni-
cal innovations. If you are already familiar Indexes
At a glance with the basic functions of your vehicle, The glossary provides explanations of the
Here you will find an overview of all the this section will be of particular interest to most important technical terms.
controls that can be operated from the you.
drivers seat. The table of contents and the index are de-
signed to help you find information quickly
Operation and easily.
Getting started Here you will find all the information you The following publications are part of your
Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehi- vehicle documentation:
need for your first drive. You should read cle. this Operators Manual
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent- the Maintenance Booklet
ing or borrowing this vehicle. Practical hints Separate operating instructions will be
This section provides fast assistance for provided as required depending on the
dealing with problems you may encounter. equipment options installed in your vehi-
Safety and Security cle.
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
features of your vehicle.

15
Introduction
Symbols

The following symbols are found in this This symbol points to instructions for
Operators Manual: Warning! G you to follow.
* Optional equipment is identified A number of these symbols appearing
Warning notices draw your attention to haz-
with an asterisk. Since standard ards that may endanger your health or life, in succession indicates a multiple-step
equipment varies between models, or the health or life of others. procedure.
the descriptions and illustrations in
Page This symbol tells you where to
this manual may differ slightly from
! look for further information on a
the actual equipment of your vehi-
topic.
cle. Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle. This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
i
page.
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful. -> In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to in-
dicate cross-references to term
definitions.
Display Words appearing in the multi-
function display are printed in
the type shown here.

16
Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety
Proper use of the vehicle
Warning! G Warning! G
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
Work improperly carried out on electronic Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody are familiar with the following information
components and associated software could or tires/wheels, for example when running and rules:
cause them to cease functioning. Because over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
the safety precautions in this manual
the vehicles electronic components are in- may cause serious damage and impair the
terconnected, any modifications made may operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a the Technical data section in this
produce an undesired effect on other sys- sudden significant vibration or ride distur- manual
tems. Electronic malfunctions could bance, or you suspect that damage to your traffic rules and regulations
seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
vehicle. your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow motor vehicle laws and safety stan-
down, and drive with caution to an area dards
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center for repairs or modifications to which is a safe distance from the road.
electronic components. Inspect the vehicle underbody and Warning! G
Other improper work or modifications on the tires/wheels for possible damage. If the ve-
hicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light vehicle. These warning labels are intended
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Truck Center or other qualified maintenance to make you and others aware of various
Some safety systems only function while the or repair facility for further inspection or re- risks. You should not remove any of these
engine is running. You should therefore nev- pairs. warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
er turn off the engine while driving. do so by information on the label itself. Re-
moval of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or per-
sonal injury.

17
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle

If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the
matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center management, or if
necessary contact us at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 4C9

18
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.

Reporting safety defects

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor ve-
hicle safety from the Hotline.

19
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices

(Including notice pursuant to California Code 9951)


Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system,
may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.

20
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Center console
Overhead control panel

21
At a glance
Cockpit

22
At a glance
Cockpit

Item Page Item Page


1 Hood lock release 222 a Windshield wiper/washer 51
2 Parking brake pedal 54 switch

3 Parking brake release 54 b Front Parktronic* warning 158


indicator
4 Left cup holder 169
c Glove box 167
5 Combination switch 50
d Right cup holder 169
Exterior lights
e Storage compartment
High beam
f Electrical outlet 173
Turn signals
g Horn
6 Cruise control lever 153 h Headlamp washer button* 133
7 Instrument cluster 117
j Steering lock with ignition 33
8 Hazard warning flasher 113
k Steering wheel lever 40
switch
9 Lever for voice control
system*, see separate
operating instructions

23
At a glance
Instrument cluster

24
At a glance
Instrument cluster

Item Page Item Page Item Page


1 Gauge for 3 Left indicator lamps Low range indicator 259
Coolant tempera- 118 with: lamp
ture Brake Assist 252 ? Engine malfunction 254
Outside tempera- 119 System indicator lamp,
ture (BAS)/Electronic USA only
Stability Program Engine malfunction 254
Fuel reserve 259 (ESP) malfunction
warning lamp indicator lamp,
warning lamp Canada only
2 Knob for { Electronic Traction 259 4 Speedometer with:
Activating instru- 117 System (4-ETS) mal-
ment cluster function indicator v 4-ETS (Electronic 258
lamp Traction
Adjusting intensity 117 System)/Electronic
of instrument lamps - Antilock Brake Sys- 248 Stability Program
Main odometer 118 tem (ABS) malfunc- (ESP) warning lamp
tion indicator lamp
Trip odometer 119 Trip/main 118
readout/reset 2 Brake pad wear in- 261 odometer
dicator lamp
Activating 237 Display for Mainte- 237
Maintenance : Low engine oil level 260 nance System
System indicator warning lamp
Engine oil level indi- 224
/ Low engine coolant 256 cator
level warning lamp

25
At a glance
Instrument cluster

Item Page Item Page Item Page


5 Photo sensor _ Steering wheel ad- 260 7 Knob for setting clock 119
(adjusts the brightness of justment not locked 8 Tachometer with:
the digital displays located < Seat belt telltale 260
in 1, 4 and 8) Display for Selector 122
1 Supplemental Re- 262 lever position
6 Right indicator lamps straint System
with: Clock 119
(SRS) indicator
W Low wind- 260 lamp 9 K Right turn signal
shield/headlamp indicator lamp
Brake warning lamp 250
washer system fluid a L Left turn signal
level warning lamp # Charge indicator 261 indicator lamp
lamp
7 Front passenger air- 249
bag switched off A High beam head- 50
lamp indicator
Front fog lamp 112
switched on

26
At a glance
Center console
Center console
Upper part Item Page Item Page
1 Air vents, automatic 144 7 Rear window 52
climate control wiper/washer switch
2 MCS, see separate 8 Rear quarter window 148
operating instructions switch*, left
3 Automatic climate control 136 9 Seat heater switch*, 98
Rear window defroster 135 drivers side
switch a Front and rear fog lamp 111
4 Seat heater switch*, 98 switch
passenger side b Indicator lamp for antitheft 83
5 Rear quarter window 148 alarm system
switch*, right c Transmission control 127
6 ESP control switch 80 switch, LOW RANGE mode

27
At a glance
Center console

Lower part Item Page Item Page


1 Ashtray with cigarette 171 7 Exterior rear view mirror 41
lighter adjustment switch
2 Gear selector lever for 47 Exterior rear view mirror 130
automatic transmission electrically folding*
3 Power window switch, right 146 8 Central locking switch 93
front door 9 Power window switch, left 146
4 Power window switch, right 146 rear door
rear door a Switch for rear door win- 74
5 Parktronic system* 159 dow override
deactivation switch b Power window switch, left 146
6 Storage compartment with 169 front door
cup holder

28
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel
Item Page Item Page
1 Front left interior lighting 114 8 Right reading lamp on/off 115
2 Signal transmitter buttons 183 9 Automatic antiglare func- 128
for garage door opener tion* on/off
3 Front right interior lighting 114 a Left reading lamp on/off 115
4 Roadside Assistance 178 b Glass breakage sensor 84
button c Trip computer* control 189
Information button 180 Tow-away alarm switch 85
5 Interior lighting control 114 d Tele Aid* (emergency call 174
6 Trip computer* display 189 system) button
7 Rear view mirror 128 e Tilt/sliding sunroof* 150
switch

29
30
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking

31
Getting started
Unlocking

The Getting started section provides an Remote control with folding key Press unlock button on the re-
overview of the vehicles most basic func- mote control.
tions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
should pay special attention to the infor-
locking knobs in the doors move up.
mation given here.
Press release button 4 on the remote
If you are already familiar with the basic
control.
functions described here, the Controls in
detail section will provide you with further The key folds out.
information. The corresponding page refer- Get in the vehicle and insert the key in
ences are located at the end of each seg- the steering lock ( page 33).
ment.
For more information, see Locking and
Remote control with folding key
unlocking ( page 88).
1 Panic button ( page 75)
2 Unlock button
3 Lock button
4 Release button for key
5 Unlock button for liftgate

32
Getting started
Unlocking

Steering lock positions 2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical


consumers) and driving position Warning! G
All lamps in the instrument cluster
come on. If a lamp in the instrument When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
cluster fails to come on when the igni- key from the steering lock and lock the vehi-
tion is switched on, have it checked cle. Do not leave children unattended in the
and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehi-
the instrument cluster remains on after cle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
starting the engine or comes on while may cause an accident and/or serious per-
driving, refer to Lamps in instrument sonal injury.
cluster ( page 248).
Steering lock 3 Starting position i
0 For removing key When you switch on the ignition, the in-
The steering is locked when the key is dicator and warning lamps in the instru-
removed from the steering lock. If ment cluster come on. This indicates
necessary, move steering wheel that the respective systems are opera-
slightly to allow the locking mechanism tional. They should go out when the en-
to engage. gine is running.
1 Unlocking steering
Power supply to some electrical con-
sumers, such as seat adjustment.

33
Getting started
Unlocking

i
The key can only be withdrawn in
position 0.
If necessary, move steering wheel
slightly to allow the key to be turned
clockwise to position 1.
A warning sounds when the drivers
door is opened and the key is in steer-
ing lock position 0 or 1.
The key can only be removed from the
steering lock with the gear selector le-
ver in position P.

!
To prevent accelerated battery dis-
charge and a possible dead battery, al-
ways remove the key from the steering
lock when the engine is not in opera-
tion.

For more information, see Remote control


with folding key ( page 88).

34
Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting

Warning! G That could cause serious or fatal injuries.


The seat backrest and seat belts provide the
Warning! G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly Children 12 years old and under must never
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas- upright position and belts are properly posi- ride in the front seat, except in a
tening of seat belts, must be done before tioned on the body. Your seat must be ad- Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1
the vehicle is put into motion. justed so that you can correctly fasten your compatible child seat, which operates with
seat belt ( page 43). the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
Seats Never place hands under the seat or near hicle to deactivate the passenger front air-
any moving parts while a seat is being ad- bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
The seats can be adjusted either manually justed. they will be struck by the airbag when it in-
or electrically, depending on the vehicles flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
equipment. fatal injury will result.
Warning! G According to accident statistics, children
Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
key from the steering lock and lock your
Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving. ing positions. Infants and small children
vehicle.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause must ride in back seats and be seated in an
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Even with the key removed from the steer- appropriate infant or child restraint system,
ing lock, the power seats* can also be oper- which is properly secured with the vehicle's
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat ated when the respective door is open. seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
back in an excessively reclined position as Therefore, do not leave children unattended lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
this can be dangerous. You could slide un- in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked accordance with the child seat manufactur-
der the seat belt in a collision. If you slide vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip- ers instructions.
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- ment may cause an accident and/or seri- 1
domen or neck. BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
ous personal injury.
Automotive Corp.

35
Getting started
Adjusting

Manual seat adjustment Seat fore and aft adjustment


A childs risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints Lift handle 1.
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
Slide seat to the desired position.
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Allow handle 1 to reengage.
Check for proper seat engagement
before driving.
Adjust seat to a comfortable seating posi-
tion that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The posi-
tion should be as far rearward as possible,
consistent with ability to properly operate
controls.

i
When moving the seat, make sure
there are no items in the footwell or
behind the seats. Otherwise you could
damage the seats.
1 Seat fore and aft adjustment
2 Backrest tilt
3 Seat height

36
Getting started
Adjusting

Seat backrest tilt Head restraint height


Switch on ignition ( page 33).
Warning! G
Turn handwheel 2 forward or back- For your protection, drive only with properly
ward until your hands are slightly ang- positioned head restraints.
led when holding the steering wheel. Adjust head restraint so that the center of
the head restraint supports the back of the
Seat height head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-
Switch on ignition ( page 33). tial for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
Lift handle 3.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
Use your body weight to push the seat 1 Release button head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
downwards. ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
Raising:
Lift your weight off the seat to obtain a dent.
Manually adjust the height of the head
higher seat position.
restraint by pulling it upward.
Release lever 3.
Lowering:
i
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
To lower the head restraint, push that it is as close to the head as possi-
release button 1 and press down on ble.
the head restraint.

37
Getting started
Adjusting

Head restraint tilt Power seat* adjustment Seat fore and aft adjustment
The seat adjustment switch is located on Press the switch forward or backward
the entry side of each front seat base. in the direction of arrow 1.
Adjust seat to a comfortable seating posi-
tion that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The posi-
tion should be as far to the rear as possi-
ble, consistent with ability to properly
operate controls.

Manually adjust the angle of the head


i
restraint. When moving the seat, make sure
there are no items in the footwell or be-
Push or pull on the upper edge of the hind the seat. Otherwise you could
head restraint cushion. damage the seat.
For more information, see Seats The memory function* ( page 105)
( page 95). lets you store the setting for the seat
1 Backrest tilt positions together with the setting for
2 Seat fore and aft adjustment the exterior rear view mirrors.
3 Seat cushion tilt
4 Seat height
Switch on ignition ( page 33).
or
Open the respective door.

38
Getting started
Adjusting

Seat cushion tilt Head restraint height


Press the switch up or down in the di-
Warning! G
rection of arrow 3 until your upper For your protection, drive only with properly
legs are lightly supported. positioned head restraints.

Seat backrest tilt Adjust head restraint so that the center of


the head restraint supports the back of the
Press the switch forward or backward head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-
in the direction of arrow 1 until your tial for injury to the head and neck in the
arms are slightly angled when holding event of an accident or similar situation.
the steering wheel.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
1 Release button head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
Seat height
Raising: ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
Press the switch up or down in the di- dent.
rection of arrow 4. Manually adjust the height of the head
restraint by pulling it upward.
Lowering:
i
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
To lower the head restraint, push that it is as close to the head as possi-
release button 1 and press down on ble.
the head restraint.

39
Getting started
Adjusting

Head restraint tilt Steering wheel Steering wheel adjustment

Warning! G
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv-
ing, or driving without the adjustment
locked could cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
Manually adjust the angle of the head key from the steering lock and lock your ve- 1 Lever
restraint. hicle. To unlock the steering column, move
Push or pull on the upper edge of the Do not leave children unattended in the ve- lever 1 to its stop down.
head restraint cushion. hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Move steering wheel to the desired po-
For more information, see Seats Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
sition.
( page 95). cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury. To lock the steering column, move
lever 1 to its stop up.
The steering wheel is once again
locked into position.

40
Getting started
Adjusting

! Mirrors Interior rear view mirror


Do not drive the vehicle until you have Manually adjust the interior rear view
properly locked the steering column. Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirror.
mirrors before driving so that you have a
If the indicator lamp _ ( page 26) good view of the road and traffic condi- For more information, see Rear view mir-
comes on while the engine is running, tions. rors ( page 128).
the steering column is not locked prop-
erly. Exterior rear view mirrors
Warning! G
In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte Warning! G
may escape the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks. Exercise care when using the passenger-
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
low the liquid to come into contact with
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
are closer than they appear. Check your in-
In case it does, immediately flush affected
terior rear view mirror or glance over your
area with water, and seek medical help if
shoulder before changing lanes.
necessary.

!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only be
completely removed while in their
liquid state and by applying plenty of
water.

41
Getting started
Adjusting

The buttons are located on the lower part Switch on ignition ( page 33). i
of the center console. With the front doors closed, the exteri-
Press button 1 for the drivers side ex-
terior rear view mirror or button 2 for or rear view mirrors can still be adjust-
the passenger-side exterior rear view ed for approximately 30 minutes after
mirror. the ignition has been switched off.
Push adjustment button 3 up, down,
left, or right according to the desired i
setting. The memory function* ( page 105)
lets you save the exterior mirror set-
! tings together with the seat and
For information on how to reposition steering wheel settings.
1 Drivers side exterior rear view mirror the exterior mirror housing when it was
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the
button i
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit
from the front), see Folding exterior At low outside temperatures, the exte-
mirror button rior mirrors will be automatically
3 Adjustment button mirrors in and out manually*
( page 130). heated.

For more information, see Rear view mir-


rors ( page 128).

42
Getting started
Driving
Driving

Warning! G Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-


sition your seat belt greatly increases your
Warning! G
Do not lay any objects in the drivers foot- risk of injuries and their likely severity in an Children 12 years old and under must never
well. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in accident. You and your passengers should ride in the front seat, except in a
the drivers footwell have sufficient clear- always wear seat belts. Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1
ance for the pedals. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries compatible child seat, which operates with
During sudden driving or braking maneu- can be considerably more severe without the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
vers, the objects could get caught between your seat belt properly buckled. Without hicle to deactivate the passenger front air-
the pedals. You could then no longer brake your seat belt buckled, you are much more bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
or accelerate. likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be they will be struck by the airbag when it in-
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
or killed. fatal injury will result.
Fastening the seat belts
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or According to accident statistics, children
death is lessened if you are wearing your are safer when properly restrained in the
Warning! G seat belt. The airbags can only provide the rear seating positions than in the front seat-
protection they were designed to afford if ing positions. Infants and small children
Always fasten your seat belt before driving the occupants are using their seat belts must ride in back seats and be seated in an
off. Always make sure your passengers are ( page 58). appropriate infant or child restraint system,
properly restrained, even those sitting in the which is properly secured with the vehicles
rear and pregnant women. seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufactur-
ers instructions.
1
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.

43
Getting started
Driving

A childs risk of serious or fatal injuries is


significantly increased if the child restraints
Warning! G
are not properly secured in the vehicle and Never let more people ride in the vehicle
the child is not properly secured in the child than there are seat belts available. Make
restraint. sure everyone riding in the vehicle is cor-
rectly restrained with a separate seat belt.
Never use a seat belt for more than one per-
Warning! G son at a time.

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat


backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
Warning! G
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
Read and observe the additional warning no-
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-
tices printed in the Safety and Security
domen or neck. That could cause serious or
section ( page 62) and ( page 64).
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
1 Latch plate
2 Buckle
3 Release button
4 Seat belt outlet

44
Getting started
Driving

With a smooth motion, pull the belt Position the lap belt as low as possible
from seat belt outlet 4. on your hips (over hip joint) and not Warning! G
across the abdomen.
Place the shoulder portion of the belt Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
across the top of your shoulder and the Place the seat backrest in a nearly up- could tear.
lap portion across your hips. right position.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
Push latch plate 1 into buckle 2 until Never use a seat belt for more than one door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
it clicks. person at a time. This could damage the belt.
If necessary, tighten the lap portion to Do not fasten a seat belt around a per- Never attempt to make modifications to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion son and another object at the same seat belts. This could impair the effective-
up. time. When using a seat belt to secure ness of the belts.
infant or toddler restraints or children
If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
in booster seats, always follow the
correct height ( page 46). severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
child seat manufacturers instructions.
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Proper use of seat belts Check your seat belt during travel to
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
make sure it is properly positioned.
Do not twist the belt when fastening. stressed in an accident must be replaced.
Make sure the seat belt is always fitted Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible snugly. Take special care of this when Truck Center.
to the middle of the shoulder (it should wearing loose clothing.
not touch the neck). Never pass the
shoulder portion of the belt under your
arm. For this purpose, you can adjust
the height of the belt outlet
( page 46).

45
Getting started
Driving

Seat belt height adjustment Adjusting seat belt higher


Seat belt height can be adjusted for the fol- Slide belt outlet upward.
lowing seats:
The belt outlet engages in various posi-
Drivers seat tions.
Passenger seat
Adjusting seat belt lower
Outer rear seats
Press and hold release button 1.
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder por-
Slide belt outlet in desired position.
tion is located as close as possible to the
middle of the shoulder (it should not touch 1 Release button Let go of release button 1.
the neck or pass under the arm).

46
Getting started
Driving

Starting the engine Automatic transmission Starting


Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
Warning! G
Do not depress accelerator.
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
Turn the key in the steering lock to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
position 3 and hold until the engine
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-
starts ( page 33).
sciousness and lead to death.
Depress the brake pedal.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly The gear selector lever lock is released.
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission For information on turning off the engine,
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, see Turning off engine ( page 55).
have the cause determined and corrected P Park position with gear selector lever
immediately. If you must drive under these lock
conditions, drive only with at least one win- R Reverse gear
dow fully open. N Neutral
D Drive position
For more information, see Automatic
transmission ( page 120).

47
Getting started
Driving

Starting difficulties Parking brake Release the parking brake by pulling on


handle 2.
If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps: The warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
Turn key in steering lock to position 0
and repeat starting procedure.
Driving
Remember that extended starting at-
Depress the brake pedal.
tempts can drain the battery.
Move gear selector lever to position D
Get a jump start ( page 291).
or R.
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a mal- 1 Parking brake pedal i
function in the engine electronics or in the 2 Release handle Wait for the gear selection process to
fuel supply system. complete before setting the vehicle in
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Warning! G motion.
Light Truck Center.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Release the brake pedal.
key from the steering lock, and lock the Carefully depress the accelerator
vehicle. pedal.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve- Once the vehicle is in motion, the auto-
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. matic central locking system engages
Children could release the parking brake, and the locking knobs drop down.
which could result in an accident and/or se-
rious personal injury.

48
Getting started
Driving

! !
If you hear a warning signal when driv- Warning! G Do not run cold engine at high engine
ing off, you have forgotten to release speeds. Running a cold engine at high
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
the parking brake. engine speeds may shorten the service
in order to obtain braking action. This could
Release the parking brake. life of the engine.
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicles ABS will not pre-
After a cold start, the automatic transmis- vent this type of loss of control. !
sion shifts at a higher engine revolution. Simultaneously depressing the acceler-
This allows the catalytic converter to reach ator pedal and applying the brake re-
!
its operating temperature earlier. duces engine performance and causes
Place the gear selector lever in premature brake and drivetrain wear.
position R only when the vehicle is
Warning! G stopped in order to avoid damaging the
For more information, see Driving instruc-
transmission.
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector tions ( page 197).
lever out of P or N if the engine speed is For information on off-road driving, see
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not Off-road driving ( page 204).
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

49
Getting started
Driving

Switching on headlamps Turn signals and high beam Turn signals


Press combination switch in direction
The combination switch is located on the The combination switch is on the left of the
of arrow 1 or 2.
left of the steering column. steering column.
The corresponding turn signal indicator
lamp K or L in the instrument
cluster flashes.
The combination switch resets auto-
matically after major steering wheel
movements.

i
To signal minor directional changes,
move combination switch only to point
Combination switch Combination switch of resistance and release. The corre-
1 Off 1 Turn signals, right sponding turn signals will flash three
2 Low beam headlamps on 2 Turn signals, left times.
3 High beam
Turn combination switch to
position . High beam
Push combination switch forward in di-
The low beam headlamps are switched
on. rection of arrow 3.

For more information, see Lighting The high beam indicator lamp A in
( page 107). the instrument cluster comes on.
For more information, see Lighting
( page 107).

50
Getting started
Driving

Windshield wipers ! Switching on windshield wipers


Vehicles with rain sensor*: Press the wiper switch to the desired
The wiper switch is located on the right of
Do not leave windshield wipers in inter- position 1, 2 or 3, depending on
the steering column.
mittent setting when the vehicle is tak- the intensity of the rain.
en to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Wipers will oper- Single wipe
ate in the presence of water sprayed on Press wiper switch briefly in the direc-
the windshield, and wipers may be tion of arrow 2.
damaged as a result.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
The switch should not be left in inter- without washer fluid.
mittent setting as the wipers will wipe
the windshield once every time the en- Wiping with windshield washer fluid
gine is started. Dust that accumulates
Wiper switch Pull and hold wiper switch in direction
on the windshield might scratch the
of arrow 4.
0 Windshield wipers off glass and/or damage the wiper blades
1 Intermittent wiping when wiping occurs on a dry wind- The windshield wiper operates with
2 Normal wiper speed shield. washer fluid.
3 Fast wiper speed For information on filling up the washer
4 Wiping with windshield wiper fluid reservoir, see Windshield washer system
Switch on ignition ( page 33). and headlamp cleaning system*
( page 230).

51
Getting started
Driving

! Rear window wiper/washer Activating intermittent wipe


If anything blocks the windshield wip- Press upper half 1 of the button.
ers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off The button is on the upper part on the cen-
ter console. The indicator lamp 2 comes on.
immediately.
For safety reasons, withdraw key Deactivating intermittent wipe
from steering lock before attempt-
Press upper half 1 of the button
ing to remove any blockage.
again.
Remove blockage.
The indicator lamp 2 goes out.
Turn the windshield wipers on
again. Wiping with windshield washer fluid
If windshield wipers fail to function at Press and hold lower half 3 of the but-
all in switch position 1, ton.
set the combination switch to the 1 Intermittent wiping
The wiper operates with washer fluid.
next highest wiper speed 2 Indicator lamp
After releasing the button the wiper op-
3 Wiping with washer fluid
have the windshield wipers erates for additional five seconds.
Switch on ignition ( page 33).
checked at the nearest authorized For more information, see Windshield
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center wipers ( page 131).

52
Getting started
Driving

Problems while driving The coolant temperature is above In case of accident


248F (120C)
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
The engine runs erratically and misfires The coolant is too hot and is no longer
Do not start the engine under any cir-
cooling the engine.
An ignition cable may be damaged. cumstances.
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible
The engine electronics may not be Notify local fire and/or police authori-
and turn off the engine. Allow engine ties.
operating properly.
and coolant to cool.
Unburned gasoline may have entered If the extent of the damage cannot be de-
Check the coolant level and add cool-
the catalytic converter and damaged it. termined:
ant if necessary ( page 227).
Give very little gas. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Have the problem repaired by an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck If no damage can be determined on the
Center as soon as possible. major assemblies
fuel system
engine mount:
Start the engine in the usual manner.

53
Getting started
Parking and locking

You have now completed your first drive. Parking brake


You have properly stopped and parked Warning! G
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
Warning! G leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
Wait until the vehicle is stationary before re-
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
moving the key from the steering lock. The
vehicle cannot be steered when the key is To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
removed. sult of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
Keep right foot on brake pedal. 1 Parking brake
Warning! G Firmly depress parking brake pedal. 2 Release handle
Move the gear selector lever to Step firmly on parking brake 1.
With the engine not running, there is no
position P.
power assistance for the brake and steering When the engine is running, the warn-
system. In this case, it is important to keep Slowly release brake pedal. ing lamp in the instrument clus-
in mind that a considerably higher degree of When parked on an incline, turn front ter will be illuminated.
effort is necessary to brake and steer the wheel towards the road curb.
vehicle. Turn the key to steering lock position 0
and remove.
Take the key and lock vehicle when leav-
ing.

54
Getting started
Parking and locking

Turning off engine


Warning! G Warning! G
Place the gear selector lever in
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Getting out of your vehicle with the gear position P.
key from the steering lock and lock the vehi- selector lever not fully engaged in position P
cle. Do not leave children unattended in the is dangerous. Also, when parked on an in- i
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehi- cline, position P alone may not prevent your Always set the parking brake in addi-
cle. Children could release the parking vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people tion to shifting to position P.
brake and/or move the gear selector lever or objects.
On steep slopes, turn the front wheels
from position P, either of which could result Always set the parking brake in addition to towards the road curb.
in an accident and/or serious personal shifting to position P ( page 123).
injury.
When parked on an incline, also turn front Turn the key in the steering lock to
wheel towards the road curb. position 0 ( page 33) and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
Switching off headlamps
i
Turn the combination switch to 1 The key can only be removed from the
( page 50). steering lock with the gear selector le-
For more information, see Lighting ver in position P.
( page 107).
Move the steering wheel slightly to al-
low the locking mechanism to engage.

55
Getting started
Parking and locking

Press the seat belt release button Locking


( page 43). Warning! G
Allow the retractor to completely re-
wind the seat belt by guiding the latch
Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock, and lock your ve-
plate. hicle. Do not leave children unattended in
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
i
openings when closing the doors. Be espe- vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
With the key removed and the drivers
cially careful when small children are ment may cause an accident and/or seri-
door open, a warning sounds if the ve-
around. ous personal injury.
hicles exterior lamps are not switched
off. Before closing doors, make sure there is no
possibility of someone getting caught in a For more information, see Locking and
door during closing. unlocking ( page 88).
Warning! G
After exiting the vehicle, press the lock
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the button on the remote control
key from the steering lock, and lock your ve- ( page 32).
hicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
The turn signal lamps flash three times
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
and the locking knobs on the doors
ment may cause an accident and/or seri-
move down.
ous personal injury.

For more information, see Locking and


unlocking ( page 88).

56
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems

57
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

In this section you will learn the most im- The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument
For your safety, we strongly recommend
portant facts about the restraint systems cluster ( page 26) comes on for about
that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
of the vehicle. four seconds when you turn the key in the
Light Truck Center immediately to have the
steering lock to position 1. It goes out
The restraint systems are system checked; otherwise the SRS may not
when you start the engine. This shows that
be activated when needed in an accident,
Seat belts the restraint systems are operational.
which could result in serious or fatal injury,
Emergency tensioning device If the lamp does not come on at all or if it or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnec-
Airbags fails to extinguish after approximately four essarily which could also result in injury.
seconds or if it comes on thereafter, a mal- In addition, improper work on the SRS cre-
Child seats function in the system has been detected. ates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative
Child seat recognition or causing unintended airbag deployment.
For more information, see the Practical
Lower anchors and tethers for children hints section ( page 262). Work on the SRS must therefore only be per-
(LATCH) formed by qualified technicians. Contact an

As independent systems, their protective Warning! G authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck


Center.
effects work in conjunction with each
other. In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
comes on during driving or does not come at
i all, the SRS self-check has detected a mal-
For information on infants and children function.
traveling with you in the vehicle and
restraint systems for infants and chil-
dren, see Children in the vehicle
( page 67).

58
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Airbags
Warning! G Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
rearward, still permitting proper opera-
tion of vehicle controls. The distance
Warning! G To reduce the risk of injury when the front
from the center of the drivers breast-
airbags inflate, it is very important for the bone to the center of the airbag cover on
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential driver and front passenger to always be in a the steering wheel must be at least
of injury and fatality in certain frontal (front properly seated position and to wear your ten inches (25 cm) or more. You should
airbags) impacts, or side (side impact and seat belt. be able to accomplish this by a combina-
head protection window curtain airbags) im- For maximum protection in the event of a tion of adjustments to the seat and
pacts which may cause significant injuries. steering wheel. If you have any prob-
collision always be in normal seated position
However, no system available today can to- lems, please see an authorized
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
tally eliminate injuries and fatalities. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
your seat belt and make sure it is properly
Airbags and emergency tensioning de-
The activation of the airbags temporarily re- positioned on your body ( page 43).
vices (ETDs) are designed to function on
leases a small amount of dust from the air- Since the airbag inflates with considerable a one-time only basis. An airbag or ETD
bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious speed and force, a proper seating and hands that was activated must be replaced.
to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in on steering wheel position will help to keep Do not lean with your head or chest
the vehicle. The dust might cause some tem- you at a safe distance from the airbag. Oc- close to the steering wheel or dash-
porary breathing difficulty for people with cupants who are unbelted, out of position or board.
asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid too close to the airbag can be seriously in-
this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle Keep hands on the outside of steering
jured by an airbag as it inflates with great wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in-
as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any force in the blink of an eye: side the rim can increase the risk and
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
Sit properly belted in a nearly upright potential severity of hand/arm injury
vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get when driver front airbag inflates.
position with your back against the seat
fresh air by opening a window or door.
backrest.

59
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Adjust the passenger seat as far as pos-


sible rearward from the dashboard when
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in severe injuries to you or other
Warning G
the seat is occupied. occupants. Accident research shows that the safest
Occupants, especially children, should If you sell your vehicle, it is important place for children in an automobile is in the
never lean their heads in the area of the that you make the buyer aware of this rear seat. Should you choose to place a child
door where the side impact airbag in-
safety information. Be sure to give the 12 years old or under in the front passenger
flates. This could result in serious inju-
buyer this Operators Manual. seat of your vehicle, you must properly use
ries or death should the airbag be
triggered. Always sit nearly upright, a BabySmartTM child restraint which will
properly use the seat belts and appropri- turn off the passenger front airbag
ate size infant or child restraint system. ( page 70). BabySmartTM will not, howev-
er, turn off any side impact airbag.
Children 12 years old and under must
never ride in the front seat, except in a It should be noted that with respect to both
Mercedes-Benz authorized front and rear side impact airbags there is a
BabySmartTM1 compatible child seat, possibility for a side airbag related injury if
which operates with the BabySmartTM occupants, especially children, are not prop-
system installed in the vehicle to deacti- erly seated or restrained when next to a side
vate the passenger front airbag when it
airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a
is properly installed. Otherwise they will
side impact in order to do its job.
be struck by the airbag when it inflates
in a crash. If this happens, serious or fa-
tal injury will result.
1
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.

60
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

To help avoid the possibility of injury, please Please contact an authorized In cases of other frontal impacts,
follow these guidelines: Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call angled impacts, roll-overs, other side
our Customer Assistance Center at impacts, rear collisions, or other acci-
(1) Occupants, especially children, should
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) dents, the airbags will not be activated.
never place their bodies or lean their
for details. The driver and passengers will then be
heads in the area of the door where the
protected by the fastened seat belts.
side airbag inflates. This could result in
serious injuries or death should the side i We caution you not to rely on the
airbag be activated. Airbags are designed to activate only in presence of the airbags in order to
certain frontal impacts (front airbags) avoid wearing your seat belt.
(2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use
the seat belts and use an appropriately and in side impacts (side impact and Your vehicle was originally equipped
sized infant or child restraint system for head protection window curtain air- with airbags that are designed to acti-
all children 12 years old or under. bags) which exceed preset thresholds. vate in certain impacts exceeding a
Only during these types of impacts, if of preset threshold to reduce the poten-
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
sufficient severity to meet the deploy- tial and severity of injury. It is important
If you believe that, even with the use of to your safety and that of your passen-
ment tresholds, will they provide their
these guidelines, it would be safer for your gers that you replace deployed airbags
supplemental protection.
rear seat occupants to have both rear door and repair any malfunctioning airbags
mounted side airbags deactivated, then The driver and passengers should to make sure the vehicle will continue
deactivation can be accomplished upon always wear their seat belts. Otherwise to provide supplemental crash protec-
your written request to do so at an it is not possible for airbags to provide tion for occupants.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck their supplemental protection.
Center at an additional cost.

61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Safety guidelines for the seat belt,


Airbags and emergency tensioning de- In addition, improper repair work on the
emergency tensioning device and vices (ETDs) are designed to function on SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
airbag a one-time only basis. An airbag or ETD inoperative or causing unintended air-
that was activated must be replaced. bag deployment. Work on the SRS must
Warning G Do not pass belts over sharp edges. therefore only be performed by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
They could tear.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were Do not make any modification that could
highly stressed in an accident must be change the effectiveness of the belts. For your protection and the protection
replaced and their anchoring points of others, when scrapping the airbag
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this unit or emergency tensioning device,
must also be checked. Use only belts in-
stalled or supplied by an authorized may severely weaken them. In a crash our safety instructions must be fol-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. they may not be able to provide ade- lowed. These instructions are available
quate protection. from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
No modifications of any kind may be
Do not hang items such as coat hangers Light Truck Center.
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or re- from the coat hooks or handles over the Given the considerable deployment
moving any component or part of the door. These items may turn into projec- speed and the textile structure of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim tiles and cause head and other injuries airbags, there is the possibility of abra-
material, badges, etc. over the steering when curtain airbag is deployed. sions or other injuries resulting from air-
wheel hub, passenger front airbag cov- Never place your feet on the instrument bag deployment.
er, or door trim panels, and installation panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
of additional electrical/electronic keep both feet on the floor in front of the
equipment on or near SRS components seat.
and wiring. Keep area between airbags Airbag system components will be hot
and occupants free from objects (e.g. after an airbag has inflated. Do not
packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.). touch.

62
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

When you sell your vehicle, we strongly Front airbags The airbags will not deploy in impacts
urge you to give notice to the subsequent which do not exceed the systems deploy-
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by ment thresholds. You will then be protec-
alerting them to the applicable section in ted by the fastened seat belts.
the Operators Manual.
The passenger front airbag will only be
deployed if:
Warning! G the passenger seat is occupied
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp the 7 indicator lamp in the instru-
comes on while driving, the SRS may not be ment cluster is not lit ( page 26)
operational. For your safety, we strongly the impact exceeds a preset deploy-
recommend that you visit an authorized 1 Driver airbag
ment threshold
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immedi- 2 Passenger front airbag
ately to have the system checked; otherwise 3 Side impact airbag !
the SRS may not be activated when needed Driver and front passenger airbags are Do not place objects heavier than
in an accident, which could result in serious deployed: 20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger
or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpect- seat. This could cause the front or side
in the event of a frontal impact
edly and unnecessarily which could also re- impact airbag on the front passenger
sult in injury. if impact exceeds a preset deployment side to deploy in a crash which exceeds
threshold the system's deployment threshold.
independently of the side impact air-
bags

63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Side impact airbags, window curtain The front passenger side impact airbag will The use of seat belts and infant and child
airbags only deploy if the system senses that the restraint systems is required by law in all
front passenger seat is occupied. 50 states, the District of Columbia, the
U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
The side impact airbags and window
curtain airbags are not deployed in im- Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
pacts which do not exceed the systems occupants should have their seat belts fas-
deployment threshold. tened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
For information on fastening seat belts,
Seat belts
see the Getting started section
( page 43).
When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale < illuminates to remind you and i
1 Window curtain airbags your passengers to fasten your seat belts.
2 Side impact airbag, rear For information on infants and children
If the drivers seat belt is not fastened be-
3 Side impact airbag, front traveling with you in the vehicle and re-
fore the engine is started, the seat belt
straint systems for infants and chil-
The side impact airbags and window telltale < illuminates and a warning
dren, see Children in the vehicle
curtain airbags are deployed: chime sounds for approximately
( page 67).
six seconds when the engine is started.
on the impacted side of the vehicle
in impacts exceeding a preset deploy-
ment threshold
independently of the front airbags

64
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G


Always fasten your seat belt before driving Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
off. Always make sure your passengers are backrest in an excessively reclined position stressed in an accident must be replaced
properly restrained, even those sitting in the as this can be dangerous. You could slide and their anchoring points must also be
rear and pregnant women. under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide checked.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and po- under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- Only use seat belts which have been ap-
sition your seat belt greatly increases your domen or neck. That could cause serious or proved by Mercedes-Benz.
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the Do not make any modifications to the seat
accident. You and your passengers should belts. This can lead to unintended activation
always wear seat belts. wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body. or to failure.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
can be considerably more severe without severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
Warning! G not be able to provide adequate protection.

likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be Have all work carried out only by qualified
Never let more people ride in the vehicle technicians. Contact an authorized
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
than there are seat belts available. Make Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
or killed.
sure everyone riding in the vehicle is cor-
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or rectly restrained with a separate seat belt.
death is lessened if you are properly wearing Never use a seat belt for more than one per-
your seat belt. Airbags can only protect as son at a time.
they are designed if the occupants are prop-
erly wearing their seat belts.

65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Warning! G The system is designed to enhance the


protection offered to properly belted oc-
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at time. Do not fasten a seat belt
cupants in certain frontal (front airbags around a person and another person or
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
and ETD) and side (side impact, window other objects.
Seat belts can only work when used curtain airbags and ETD) impacts which Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
properly. Never wear seat belts in any exceed preset deployment thresholds. crash, you wouldnt have the full width
other way than as described in this sec- Never wear the shoulder belt under your of the belt to manage impact forces. The
tion, as that could result in serious inju- arm, against your neck or off your shoul- twisted belt against your body could
ries in case of an accident. der. In a crash, your body would move cause injuries.
Each occupant should wear their seat too far forward. That would increase the Pregnant women should also use a
belt at all times, because seat belts help chance of head and neck injuries. The lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
reduce the likelihood of and potential belt would also apply too much force to should be positioned as low as possible
severity of injuries in accidents, includ- the ribs or abdomen, which could se- on the hips to avoid any possible pres-
ing rollovers. The integrated restraint verely injure internal organs such as sure on the abdomen.
system includes SRS (driver airbag, pas- your liver or spleen.
senger front airbag, front and rear door Never place your feet on the instrument
Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
mounted side impact airbags and win- panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always
objects in or on your clothing, such as keep both feet on the floor in front of the
dow curtain airbags), ETD (seat belt eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these
emergency tensioning device for the seat.
might cause injuries.
outboard passenger seats [except in the
optional third row seats]), and front seat Position the lap belt as low as possible
knee bolsters. on your hips and not across the abdo-
men. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
in a crash.

66
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Emergency tensioning device, seat belt In an impact, emergency tensioning devic- Children in the vehicle
force limiter es remove slack from the belts in such a
way that the seat belts fit more snugly If an infant or child is traveling with you in
The seat belts for the front seats are
against the body. Belt force limiters reduce the vehicle:
equipped with emergency tensioning de-
the force exerted by the seat belts on oc- Secure the child using an infant or child
vices and belt force limiters. The outboard
cupants during a crash. restraint appropriate to the age and
passenger seats belts (except in the third
row seats*) are equipped with emergency size of the child.
tensioning devices. Warning! G Make sure the infant or child is proper-
The ETD is designed to activate in the ly secured by a belt at all times while
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that the vehicle is in motion.
following cases:
was activated must be replaced.
in frontal or rear-end impacts exceed- Infant and child restraint seats and infor-
When disposing of the emergency tension-
ing a preset severity level mation on choosing an appropriate re-
ing device, our safety instructions must be
straint system can be obtained from any
if the restraint systems are operational followed. These are available at your autho-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
and functioning correctly, see rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Center.
1 indicator lamp ( page 58)

i !
The ETDs for the front seats will only Do not place objects heavier than
activate if the respective front seat belt 20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger
is fastened (latch plate properly insert- seat. This could cause the front or side
ed into buckle). impact airbag on the front passenger
side to deploy in a crash which exceeds
The ETDs for the rear outer seats will the systems deployment threshold.
activate with or without the respective
seat belt fastened.

67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Infant and child restraint systems i !


Use only a BabySmartTM1 compatible child For information on child seats with The use of infant or child restraints is
restraint for the front passenger seat in anchor fittings for tether anchorages, required by law in all 50 states, the
this vehicle. see Installation of infant and child re- District of Columbia, the U.S. territo-
straint system ( page 71). ries and all Canadian provinces.
We recommend that all infants and
children be properly restrained at all times For information on child seat anchors Infants and small children should be
while the vehicle is in motion. All lap-shoul- LATCH type, see ( page 73). seated in an appropriate infant or child
der belts except the drivers seat belt have restraint system properly secured by a
special seat belt retractors for secure fas- lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a
tening of child restraints. Warning! G child restraint lower anchorage system
that complies with U.S. Federal Motor
To fasten a child restraint, follow child re-
Never release the seat belt buckle while the Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
straint instructions for mounting. Then pull
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
shoulder belt out completely and let it re-
belt retractor will be deactivated. Standard 213 and 210.2.
tract. During the seat belt retraction a
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate A statement by the child restraint man-
that the special seat belt retractor is acti- ufacturer of compliance with this stan-
vated. The belt is now locked. Push down dard can be found on the instruction
on child restraint to take up any slack. label on the restraint and in the instruc-
tion manual provided with the restraint.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual man-
ner.

1 BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens


Automotive Corp.

68
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

When using any infant or child restraint


system, make sure to carefully read Warning! G Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
and follow all manufacturers instruc- During an accident, they could be crushed
Children 12 years old and under must never
tions for installation and use. between the occupant and seat belt.
ride in the front seat, except in a
Please read and observe warning labels Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM A childs risk of serious or fatal injuries is
affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant compatible child seat, which operates with significantly increased if the child restraints
or child restraints. the BabySmartTM System installed in the ve- are not properly secured in the vehicle and
hicle to deactivate the passenger front air- the child is not properly secured in the child
bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise restraint.
they will be struck by the airbag when it in-
flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury can result.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicles
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufactur-
ers instructions.

69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

BabySmartTM airbag deactivation Self-test BabySmartTM without special


Warning! G system child seat installed

Children too big for child restraint systems Special BabySmartTM1 compatible child After turning the key in the steering lock to
must ride in back seats using regular seat seats, designed for use with the position 1 or 2, the 7 indicator lamp lo-
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest Mercedes-Benz system and available at cated in the instrument cluster comes on
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck for approximately six seconds, extin-
seat may be necessary to achieve proper Center, are required for use with the guishes, then flashes once.
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system.
If the indicator lamp should not come on or
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder With the special seat properly installed,
is continuously lit, the system is not func-
belt fits properly without a booster. the passenger front airbag will not deploy.
tioning. You must see an authorized
When the child restraint is not in use, re- The 7 indicator lamp located in the in- Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center before
move it from the vehicle or secure it with the strument cluster will be illuminated, ex- seating any child on the front passenger
seat belt to prevent the child restraint from cept with the key removed or in steering seat.
becoming a projectile in the event of an ac- lock position 0 ( page 33). For more information, see the Practical
cident. hints section ( page 249).
i
Do not leave children unattended in the ve- The system does not deactivate the
hicle, even if the children are secured in a door mounted side impact airbag, the
child restraint system. Unsupervised chil- window curtain airbags and the emer-
dren in a child restraint system may use ve- gency tensioning device.
hicle equipment and may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

1 BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens


Automotive Corp.

70
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Installation of infant and child restraint


Warning! G Please make sure to check the indicator ev-
ery time you use the special system child
system
seat. Guide top tether strap between head
The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation sys-
tem will ONLY work with a special child seat Should the light go out while the restraint is restraint and top of seat back. Head
designed to operate with it. It will not work installed, please check installation. If the restraint must be installed and posi-
with child seats which are not BabySmartTM light remains out, do not use the tioned such that the top tether strap
compatible. BabySmartTM restraint to transport children can pass freely between the head re-
on the passenger seat until the system has straint and top of seat back.
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces been repaired.
the effectiveness of the deactivation sys-
tem. The bottom of the child seat must
make full contact with the passenger seat Warning! G
cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat
Do not place powered-on laptops, cell
could cause injuries to the child in case of an
phones and like electronic devices on the
accident, instead of protecting the child.
front passenger seat. Signals from such de-
Follow the manufacturers instructions for vices may interfere with the BabySmartTM
installation of special child seats. system. Such signal interference may cause
When using a BabySmartTM compatible the 7 indicator lamp not to come on dur- 1 Hook
child seat on the front passenger seat, the ing self-test or be continuously lit, indicating 2 Anchorage ring
passenger front airbag will not deploy only if that the system is not functioning.
the 7 indicator lamp remains illumi-
nated.

71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Securely fasten the hook 1 to the an- This vehicle is provided with three tether This vehicle is provided with tether anchor-
chorage ring 2. anchorages 3 for a top tether strap be- ages for a top tether strap behind the
hind the second row seats. second row seats 3 and the third row
For safety, make sure the hook has at-
seats 4.
tached to the ring beyond the safety !
catch, as illustrated. When using the third row observe the
Do not use the tether anchorages 4
following:
Once the top tether anchorage hook is for a top tether strap on a second row
attached, the child restraint itself can be seat. Installation of infant and child restraint
secured. Tigthen the top tether strap systems with a top tether strap is al-
according to the child restraint manufac- Vehicle with third row seats* lowed only on both third row seats plus
turers instructions. the center second row seat.
When using the center second row seat
Vehicle without third row seats for a top tether strap, the left third row
seat should only be used for a child re-
straint system, since exiting the vehicle
may not be possible in an emergency
due to the routing of the top tether
strap.
When installing an infant or child re-
straint system with a top tether strap
3 Anchorage rings for second row seats
on the left second row seat, the left
4 Anchorage rings for third row seats*
third row seat should not be occupied.
3 Anchorage rings for second row seats
4 Anchorage rings for third row seats*

72
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

! Child seat anchors LATCH type i


An infant and child restraint system This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH With a child seat installed in the left
must not be installed on the right (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) rear seat, the seat belt for the center
second row seat while a passenger type anchors (at each of the rear seats) for seat occupied by a passenger must op-
rides in a third row seat. An infant and the installation of a LATCH child seat with erate freely. Guide seat belt between
child restraint system installed on the matching mounting fittings. its seat cushion mount and backrest
right second row seat will prevent the mount along outside of right side child
use of the easy-entry/exit feature seat mount.
( page 101).
Non-LATCH type child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the
vehicles seat belt system. Install child
seat according to the manufacturers
instructions.

1 Anchors
Install a LATCH type child seat accord-
ing to the manufacturers instructions.

73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Blocking of rear door window operation


Warning! G Warning! G
Install child seat according to manufactu- Activate the override switch when children
rers instructions. are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The child seat must be firmly attached in the The children may otherwise injure them-
right and left side anchors. selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win-
dow opening.
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
loose during an accident. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock, and lock the ve-
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or hicle. Do not leave children unattended in
child seat mounting fittings must be re- the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
placed. 1 Override switch
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
Do not leave children unattended in the ve- Slide override switch 1 to the right. ment may cause an accident and/or seri-
hicle, even if the children are secured in a A dot becomes visible. The rear win- ous personal injury.
child restraint system. dows can no longer be operated using
Children too big for child restraint systems the switch in the rear doors. For more information on power windows,
must ride in back seats using regular seat see Power windows ( page 146).
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
belt fits properly without a booster.

74
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
Panic alarm
An audible alarm and flashing turn signal Activating i
lamps will operate for approximately For operation in the USA only:
2 minutes. Press and hold button 1 for at least
This device complies with Part 15 of
one second.
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
Deactivating
(1) This device may not cause harmful
Press button 1 again. interference, and
or (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
Insert key in steering lock.
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
1 button
device could void the users authority
to operate the equipment.

75
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

In this section you will find information on ABS


the following driving safety systems: Warning! G
ABS (Antilock Brake System) The following factors increase the risk of Warning! G
BAS (Brake Assist System) accidents:
Excessive speed, especially in turns Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
4-ETS (Electronic Traction System)
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
EBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning) Wet and slippery road surfaces
ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
Following another vehicle too closely the ABS and significantly reduces braking
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
The ABS, BAS, ESP and 4-ETS cannot reduce effectiveness.
i this risk.
In winter operation, the maximum ef- Always adjust your driving style to the pre- The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
fectiveness of the ABS, the BAS, the vailing road and weather conditions. the brake pressure so that the wheels do
ESP, the EBP, and the 4-ETS is only not lock during braking. This allows you to
achieved with winter tires (M+S tires) maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
or snow chains as required.
The ABS is functional above a speed of ap-
proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will re-
spond even with light brake pressure.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster ( page 25) comes on when you
turn the key in the steering lock to
position 2. It goes out when the engine is
running.

76
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

Braking Emergency brake maneuver LOW RANGE ABS


At the instant one of the wheels is about to Keep continuous full pressure on the During off-road driving, a special low range
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal. system for the ABS is operational with
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in transmission in LOW RANGE mode
the regulating mode. i ( page 127).
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS,
Keep firm and steady pressure on the When applying the service brakes at
the ESP, and the 4-ETS are also
brake pedal while experiencing the pul- speeds below approximately
switched off.
sation. 18 mph (30 km/h), the front wheels are
Normal driving and braking functions locked cyclically to shorten the braking
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
are still available. distance (dig-in effect). This affects steer-
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to ing the vehicle.
steer the vehicle.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-
tion of hazardous road conditions and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
while driving.

77
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

BAS
Warning! G Warning! G
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of emergency situations. If you apply the The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency be- provides full brake boost, thereby poten- it increase braking efficiency beyond that af-
yond that afforded by the condition of the tially reducing braking distance. Apply con- forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction tinuous full braking pressure until the and tires or the traction afforded. The BAS
afforded. The ABS cannot prevent acci- emergency braking situation is over. The cannot prevent accidents, including those
dents, including those resulting from exces- ABS will prevent the wheels from locking. resulting from excessive speed in turns, fol-
sive speed in turns, following another lowing another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
When you release the brake pedal, the
vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can pre- driver can prevent accidents. The capabili-
is then deactivated.
vent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS ties of a BAS equipped vehicle must never
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in The indicator lamp in the instrument be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
a reckless or dangerous manner which cluster ( page 25) comes on when you manner which could jeopardize the users
could jeopardize the users safety or the turn the key in the steering lock to safety or the safety of others.
safety of others. position 2. It goes out when the engine is
running. For more information, see Practical hints
For more information, see Practical Hints ( page 251).
( page 248).

78
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

4-ETS !
Warning! G Because of the ESPs automatic opera-
The 4-Electronic Traction System (4-ETS) tion, the engine must be shut off (Key in
improves vehicles ability to utilize avail- When you see the 4-ETS/ESP-warning
steering lock position 0 or 1) when the
able traction, especially under slippery lamp v flashing in the speedometer,
parking brake is being tested on a
road conditions. The brakes are applied to then proceed as follows:
brake test dynamometer.
the spinning wheel and power is trans- While driving off, apply as little throttle
ferred to the wheel(s) with traction. as possible. Active braking action through ESP may
otherwise seriously damage the front
The traction control engages at vehicle While driving ease up on the accelera-
or rear axle brake system.
speeds up to approximately 24 mph tor.
(40 km/h), and switches off at approxi- Adapt your speed and driving style to Operational tests with the engine
mately 50 mph (80 km/h). the prevailing road conditions. running can only be conducted on a
two-axle dynamometer.
The { indicator lamp in the instrument Failure to observe these guidelines could
cluster ( page 25) comes on when you cause the vehicle to skid.
turn the key to position 2. It goes out when The 4-ETS cannot prevent accidents resul-
i
the engine is running. ting from excessive speed. If the yellow 4-ETS malfunction indica-
tor lamp { comes on while the
The 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v, loca-
4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v flash-
ted in the speedometer dial, starts to flash
es, the electronic traction system is be-
at any vehicle speed, as soon as the tires
ing switched off temporarily to prevent
lose traction and the wheels begin to spin.
overheating of the drive wheel brakes.

79
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

LOW RANGE 4-ETS ESP


During off-road driving, a special low range
Warning! G
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
system for the 4-ETS is operational with Never switch off the ESP when you see the
monitors the vehicles traction (force of ad-
transmission in LOW RANGE mode. 4-ETS/ESP-warning lamp v flashing in
hesive friction between the tires and the
For more information, see the Practical road surface) and handling. the speedometer. In this case, proceed as
hints section ( page 248) and follows:
The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spin-
( page 259). While driving off, apply as little throttle
ning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By ap-
plying brakes to the appropriate wheel and as possible.
EBP
by limiting engine output, the ESP works to While driving ease up on the accelera-
stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially tor.
The EBP enhances braking effectiveness
useful while driving off and on wet or slip- Adapt your speed and driving style to
by allowing the rear brakes to supply a
pery road surfaces. the prevailing road conditions.
greater proportion of the braking effort
without a loss of vehicle stability. The 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v in the Failure to observe these guidelines could
speedometer flashes when the ESP is en- cause the vehicle to skid.
gaged. The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
The indicator lamp in the instrument from excessive speed.
cluster ( page 25) and the 4-ETS/ESP
warning lamp v in the speedometer
come on when you turn the key to
position 2. They go out when the engine is
running.

80
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

! Switching off the ESP


Warning! G Because of the ESPs automatic opera-
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of
tion, the engine must be shut off (Key in Warning! G
steering lock position 0 or 1) when the
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
parking brake is being tested on a The ESP should not be switched off during
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
brake test dynamometer. normal driving other than in the circum-
cannot prevent accidents, including those
Active braking action through ESP may stances described below. Disabling of the
resulting from excessive speed in turns, fol-
otherwise seriously damage the front system will reduce vehicle stability in stan-
lowing another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
or rear axle brake system. dard driving maneuvers.
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabili- Operational tests with the engine
ties of an ESP equipped vehicle must never To improve the vehicles traction, turn off
running can only be conducted on a
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous the ESP in driving situations where it would
two-axle dynamometer.
manner which could jeopardize the users be advantageous to have the drive wheels
safety or the safety of others. spin and thus cut into surfaces for better
LOW RANGE ESP grip such as:
During off-road driving, a special low range starting out on slippery surfaces and in
system for the ESP is operational with deep snow in conjunction with snow
transmission in LOW RANGE mode chains
( page 127).
in sand or gravel
In the LOW RANGE mode, the ESP ope-
rates in a traction improving fashion spe- when driving off-road
cifically adapted for off-road driving. At
speeds below 27 mph (45 km/h), the ESP
assists in over-/understeering, thus im-
proving vehicle traction.

81
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

! The switch is located on the upper center Traction control brakes a spinning wheel
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an console. even when the ESP is deactivated.
extended period of time with the ESP The ESP always operates when you are
switched off. This may cause serious braking, even when it has been deactiva-
damage to the drivetrain which is not ted.
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Warning! G
i When the 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v is
Turn ESP on immediately if the afore- illuminated continuously, the ESP is
mentioned circumstances do not apply switched off.
anymore. ESP on/off switch Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
Press upper half of the ESP switch. ing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP.
The 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v in
the speedometer comes on.
Switching on the ESP
The ESP is deactivated.
Press lower half of the ESP switch until
If one or more drive wheels are spinning, the 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v in
the 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v in the the speedometer goes out.
speedometer flashes, regardless of the
speed. You are now again in normal driving
mode.
For more information, see the Practical
hints section ( page 247).

82
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer Anti-theft alarm system i
If the alarm stays on for more than
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized Once the alarm system has been armed, a
30 seconds, a call to the Response
persons from starting your vehicle. visual and audible alarm is triggered when
Center is initiated automatically by the
someone:
Tele Aid* system ( page 174) provid-
Activating
opens a door ed Tele Aid service was subscribed to
Removing the key from the steering lock and properly activated, and that neces-
opens the liftgate
activates the immobilizer. sary cellular service and GPS coverage
opens the hood are available.
Deactivating The alarm will stay on even if the activating
Turning the key in the steering lock to element (a door, for example) is immedi- Arming the alarm system
position 2 ( page 33) deactivates the im- ately closed. The alarm system is armed after locking
mobilizer. The alarm system will also be triggered the vehicle with the remote control. The
when turn signal lamps flash three times to indi-
i cate that the alarm system is activated. A
In case the engine cannot be started someone attempts to raise the vehicle
red indicator lamp in the center console
(yet the vehicles battery is charged), unlocking and opening the drivers will flash after approximately 10 seconds
the system is not operational. Contact door with the mechanical key when the alarm system is completely
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light armed ( page 27).
Truck Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

83
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems

i i attempts to raise the vehicle


If the turn signal lamps do not flash The alarm system will rearm automati- breaks a window and reaches into the
three times, the tow-away - glass cally again after approximately passenger compartment
breakage sensor is malfunctioning or 40 seconds if one of the doors or the
one of the following elements may not liftgate is not opened. i
be properly closed: The tow-away protection alarm is trig-
a door Canceling the alarm gered, for example, if the vehicle is
lifted on one side.
the liftgate To cancel the alarm:
If the alarm stays on for more than
the hood Switch on ignition ( page 33). 30 seconds, a call to the Response
Close the respective element and lock or Center is initiated automatically by the
Tele Aid* system ( page 174) provid-
the vehicle again. Press the or button on the
ed Tele Aid service was subscribed to
remote control.
and properly activated, and that neces-
Disarming the alarm system
The alarm is canceled. sary cellular service and GPS coverage
The alarm system is disarmed when you are available.
unlock your vehicle with the remote con- Tow-away alarm, glass breakage
trol. The turn signal lamps flash once to in- sensor
dicate that the alarm system is
deactivated. The tow-away alarm and the glass break-
age sensor are part of the anti-theft alarm
system.
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
and audible alarm will be triggered when
someone:

84
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems

Arming tow-away alarm and glass Vehicles with trip computer* Turn key in steering lock to position 2
breakage sensor ( page 33).
The buttons are located in the overhead
When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away control panel. Return key to position 0 and remove it
and glass breakage sensor alarm is auto- from the steering lock.
matically armed.
Within 30 seconds press button 1
or 2.
Disarming tow-away alarm and glass
breakage sensor The display shows OFF.
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm Exit vehicle and lock vehicle with
feature, switch off the tow-away alarm and remote control ( page 32).
glass breakage sensor before towing the The tow-away alarm and glass breakage
vehicle, or when parking on a surface sub- sensor remain switched off until the key is
ject to movement, such as a ferry or auto inserted in steering lock and turned to
train. 1 Reset button
position 1.
2 Mode button
3 Display
4 Glass breakage sensor

85
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems

Vehicles without trip computer* Turn key in steering lock to position 2 Canceling the alarm
( page 33).
The buttons are located in the overhead To cancel the alarm:
control panel. Return key to position 0 and remove it
Switch on ignition ( page 33).
from the steering lock.
or
Within 30 seconds press button 1 on
the right or left side. Press the or button on the
remote control.
Exit vehicle and lock vehicle with
remote control ( page 32). The alarm is canceled.
The tow-away alarm and glass breakage
sensor remain switched off until the key is
inserted in steering lock and turned to
position 1.
1 Switching off tow-away alarm and glass
breakage sensor

86
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function*
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Automatic transmission
Transmission control LOW RANGE mode
Good visibility
Automatic climate control
Power windows
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features

87
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

In the Controls in detail section you will For more information on locking and un-
find detailed information on how to oper- locking, see Getting started ( page 31)
ate the equipment installed in your vehicle. and ( page 55).
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions of your vehicle, this section will Remote control with folding key
be of particular interest to you.
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba-
remote controls with folding key.
sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
Getting started section of this manual. The remote control provides an extended
The corresponding page numbers are operating range. To prevent theft,
Remote control with folding key
given at the beginning of each segment. however, it is advisable to only unlock the
vehicle when you are in close proximity to 1 Panic button ( page 75)
it. 2 Unlock button
3 Lock button
The key centrally locks and unlocks:
4 Release button for key
the doors 5 Unlock button for liftgate
the liftgate
the fuel filler flap

88
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Unlocking Unlocking the drivers door and fuel


Warning! G filler flap
Global unlocking
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Press button once.
key from the steering lock, and lock your ve- Press button twice.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
hicle. Do not leave children unattended in All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knob in the drivers door moves
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked locking knobs in the doors move up. up. The anti-theft alarm system is
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip- The anti-theft alarm system is switched switched off.
ment may cause an accident and / or seri- off.
ous personal injury. Unlocking the liftgate
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system Press button .
! within approximately 40 seconds of
Only the liftgate unlocks.
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid unlocking if:
exposing the remote control to high neither door nor liftgate is opened Locking
levels of electromagnetic radiation.
the key is not inserted in the starter Press button once.
switch All turn signal lamps flash three times
i
the central locking switch is not to indicate that all doors, the liftgate
If the key is inserted in the steering
lock, the vehicle cannot be locked or activated and the fuel filler flap are locked. The
unlocked with the remote control. anti-theft alarm system is activated.

89
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

! Loss of remote control with folding key Opening the doors from the inside
If you can no longer lock or unlock the If you lose a remote control or the folding
vehicle with the remote control, then You can open a locked door from the in-
key, you should do the following:
the batteries in the remote control are side. Open door only when conditions are
Have the remote control deactivated safe to do so.
discharged, the remote control is mal-
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
functioning or the vehicle battery is
Truck Center.
drained.
Report the loss of the remote control or
Check the batteries in the remote
the folding key immediately to your car
control and replace them if neces-
insurance company.
sary ( page 273).
If necessary have the mechanical lock
Use the folding key to unlock or
replaced.
lock the drivers door as required
( page 268). Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center will be glad to supply you
Lock the liftgate if necessary from
with a replacement. 1 Locking knob
inside ( page 91).
2 Inside door handle
Check the vehicle battery
( page 272). Front doors
Synchronize the remote control Pull on door handle 2 on the respec-
( page 273). tive front door to open door.
If the remote control is malfunctioning, If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz move up.
Light Truck Center.

90
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Rear doors Opening the liftgate !


Pull up locking knob 1 on the respec- Always make sure that there is suffi-
tive rear door. Opening the liftgate from outside cient overhead clearance.
Pull on door handle 2 on the respec- A minimum height clearance of 7 ft
tive rear door to open door. Opening the liftgate from inside
(2.15 m) is required to open the liftgate.
A minimum height clearance of 7 ft
i The handle is located above the rear
(2.15 m) is required to open the liftgate.
license plate recess.
If the vehicle has previously been
The release lever is located on the inside of
locked from the outside using the
the liftgate.
remote control, opening a door from
the inside will trigger the alarm.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the
following:
Switch on the ignition by turning
the key in the steering lock to
position 2.
Press the or button on
1 Grip molding
the remote control.
2 Handle
1 Release lever
The vehicle must be unlocked.
2 Catch
Pull on handle 2.
To unlock the liftgate, move the
Swing the liftgate upward by using the catch 2 to the right.
grip molding 1.

91
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Pull release lever 1 down and swing Pull down on recessed grip 1.
liftgate upward.
Close liftgate by using grip molding 2.
Warning! G
! Only drive with the liftgate closed as exhaust
Always make sure that there is suffi- Warning! G fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
cient overhead clearance.
To prevent possible personal injury, always
i
keep hands and fingers away from the lift-
i Do not place the key in the cargo com-
gate opening when closing the liftgate. Be
To lock the liftgate, move the catch 2 especially careful when small children are partment. You may lock yourself out.
to the left. around.
Do not close the liftgate from the inside by i
Closing the liftgate If the vehicle was previously centrally
pulling on the handle.
locked, the liftgate lid will lock auto-
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
matically when closed. The turn signals
key from the steering lock and lock the vehi-
will flash three times to confirm lock-
cle. Do not leave children unattended in the
ing.
vehicle. Children could open the liftgate
from inside, which could result in an acci-
dent and/or serious personal injury.

1 Recessed grip
2 Grip molding

92
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Automatic central locking i The switch is located on the lower center


The doors unlock automatically after an console.
The doors and the liftgate automatically
accident if the force of the impact ex-
lock when the ignition is switched on and
ceeds a preset threshold.
the left front wheel turns at vehicle speeds
of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or To prevent the vehicle door locks from
more. locking, deactivate the automatic cen-
tral locking when the vehicle
You can open a locked door from the in-
side. Open door only when conditions are is pushed or towed
safe to do so. is on a test stand
If one of the front doors is then opened during a wheel change
from the inside, the vehicle is unlocked Central locking switch
centrally unless only the driver's door was
You can deactivate the automatic locking 1 Locking
previously unlocked.
using the central locking switch. 2 Unlocking
Switch on ignition ( page 33).

93
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Activating Locking and unlocking from the inside i


Press and hold upper part 1 of the You can open a locked door from the
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
central locking switch for approximate- inside. Open door only when conditions
liftgate from inside using the central lock-
ly six seconds. are safe to do so.
ing switch. This can be useful, for example,
The automatic central locking is if you want to lock the vehicle before start- If the vehicle was previously centrally
activated. ing to drive. locked using the remote control, it will
not unlock using the central locking
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or un-
Deactivating switch.
locked with the central locking switch.
Press and hold lower part 2 of the
central locking switch for approximate- The switch is located on the lower center
ly six seconds.
Warning! G console ( page 93).

The automatic central locking is deacti- When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Locking
vated. key from the steering lock and lock the vehi-
cle. Do not leave children unattended in the Press upper part 1 of central locking
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehi- switch.
cle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment If all the doors are closed, the vehicle
may cause an accident and/or serious per- locks.
sonal injury.
Unlocking
Press lower part 2 of central locking
switch.
The vehicle unlocks.

94
Controls in detail
Seats
Seats
For information on seat adjustment, see Front seat head restraints
the Getting started section ( page 35). Warning! G
Removing and installing front seat For your protection, drive only with properly
head restraints positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the center of
For more information on head restraint ad- the head restraint supports the back of the
justment, see the Getting started section head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-
( page 35). tial for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
i
Adjust the head restraint in such a way Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend- 1 Release button
that it is as close to the head as possi-
ble. ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent. Removing front seat head restraints
Do not interchange head restraints from Pull head restraint to its highest
front and rear seat. position.
Push release button 1 and pull out
head restraint.

95
Controls in detail
Seats

Installing front seat head restraint Raising:


Insert head restraint and push it down Manually adjust the height of the head
Warning! G
to the stop. restraint by pulling it upward. For your protection, drive only with properly
Push release button 1 and adjust Lowering: positioned head restraints.
head restraint to the desired position To lower the head restraint, push Adjust head restraint so that the center of
( page 37). release button 1 and press down on the head restraint supports the back of the
the head restraint. head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-
Rear seat head restraints tial for injury to the head and neck in the
i event of an accident or similar situation.
Head restraint height Adjust the head restraint in such a way Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
that it is as close to the head as possi- head restraints. Head restraints are
ble. intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
Do not interchange head restraints from
front and rear seat.

1 Release button

96
Controls in detail
Seats

Head restraint tilt Removing and installing rear seat head


restraints

Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the center of
the head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-
1 Release button
Manually adjust the angle of the head tial for injury to the head and neck in the
restraint. event of an accident or similar situation.
Removing rear seat head restraints
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
Push or pull on the upper edge of the Pull head restraint to its highest
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
head restraint cushion. position.
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
For more information on seats, see the dent. Push release button 1 and pull out
Getting started section ( page 35). head restraint.
Do not interchange head restraints from
front and rear seat. i
For a better view toward the rear, you
can store the rear center head restraint
underneath the rear seat ( page 98).

97
Controls in detail
Seats

Installing rear seat head restraints Remove rear center head restraint Heated seats*
( page 97).
Insert head restraint and push it down
Both switches for the front seats are loca-
to the stop. If necessary, remove cargo floor plates,
ted in the center console.
see Removing cargo floor plates
Push release button 1 and adjust
( page 165).
head restraint to the desired position
( page 37). Slide rear seats forward, see Adjusting
rear seat fore and aft ( page 100).
Stowing rear center head restraint Fold rear seat backrests down, see
Folding down the backrest
( page 100).
From cargo compartment, attach rear
center head restraint 1 to underside
of rear center seat. 1 Normal heating
Make sure front side of head 2 Rapid heating
restraint 1 is facing upward. Start the engine.
Press bar 2 on both sides into
clips 3. Switching on seat heating
1 Rear center head restraint
2 Bar Press upper switch position 1.
3 Clip A red indicator lamp on the switch
lights up.

98
Controls in detail
Seats

Switching off seat heating Switching off rapid seat heating Rear seats
Press upper switch position 1 again. Press lower switch position 2 again.
The indicator lamp on the switch turns Both red indicator lamps on the switch Warning! G
off. turn off.
Do not adjust the rear seats while driving.
i !
When using the rear seats, always make
The seat heater will be automatically If one or both of the lamps on the seat
sure the seats are folded up and in the
switched off after approximately heater switch are flashing, there is in-
locked position, and the seat belts are prop-
20 minutes. sufficient voltage available since too
erly positioned on the body. Your seat must
many electrical consumers are turned
be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten
Switching on rapid seat heating on. The seat heater switches off auto-
your seat belt.
matically.
Press lower switch position 2. Adjust head restraint so that the center of
The seat heater will switch back on the head restraint supports the back of the
Both red indicator lamps on the switch again automatically as soon as suffi-
turn on. head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-
cient voltage is available. tial for injury to the head and neck in the
i event of an accident or similar situation.
The system switches over to normal Never place hands under the seat or near
heating mode after approximately five any moving parts while a seat is being ad-
minutes. Only one red indicator lamp justed.
remains on.

99
Controls in detail
Seats

The rear seats are divided asymmetrically. Slide seat to the desired position until Move front seats forward. Manual seat
To enlarge the cargo compartment you can it locks in place. ( page 36) or power seat ( page 38).
adjust the left and right part separately.
Slide seat forward.
The following changes are possible:
Warning! G Remove head restraint(s) ( page 95).
moving the seat fore and aft
Failure to assure that seats are locked into Pull lock button 1 up and fold back-
folding down the backrest
place could result in an increased chance of rest forward until it locks in place.
lowering the seat injury in an accident. The red backrest lock indicator at lock
button 1 is not visible in the locked
Adjusting rear seat fore and aft
Folding down the backrest position.

Folding up the backrest


Close cup holder ( page 170) and
ashtray ( page 172) in rear center
console.
Pull lock button 1 up and unfold back-
rest until it locks in place.
Make sure the seat belt is not caught in
the seat.
1 Release lever
1 Lock button
Check for secure locking by pulling and
Pull release lever 1 in direction of Close cup holder ( page 170) and pushing on the backrest.
arrow. ashtray ( page 172) in rear center
console ( page 170).

100
Controls in detail
Seats

The red backrest lock indicator at lock Close cup holder in rear center console Folding up the rear seat
button 1 is not visible in the locked ( page 170).
Move front seats forward. Manual seat
position.
Move front seats forward. Manual seat ( page 36) or power seat ( page 38).
Install head restraint ( page 96). ( page 36) or power seat ( page 38).
Pull release lever 3 and raise rear seat
Slide seat rearward to desired position Press and hold release button 1 to un- until it locks in place.
( page 100). lock lever 2.
Adjust front seats to desired position. Pull lever 2 in direction of arrow. Warning! G
Manual seats ( page 36) or power
Pull release lever 3 and push down
seats ( page 38). Failure to assure that seats are locked into
rear seat until it locks in place.
place could result in an increased chance of
Lowering the rear seat Fold down the backrest ( page 100). injury in an accident.
Adjust front seats to desired position.
Manual seats ( page 36) or power Easy entry/exit feature*
seats ( page 38).
The easy entry/exit feature allows access
to the third row seats*. The right cargo
floor plate must be removed ( page 165).

Warning! G
Never drive with the second row right seat
1 Release button folded forward (easy entry/exit feature). It
2 Lever could open and fold back unintentionally.
3 Release lever

101
Controls in detail
Seats

Folding rear seat forward Resetting rear seat Move the rear and front seats in de-
sired position.
Pull up and adjust head restraint
( page 37).

Third row seats*

Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
1 Lever Pull down on seat bench until it locks positioned head restraints.
into place.
Move right seat forward. Manual seats Adjust head restraint so that the center of
( page 36) or power seats Pull lock button 1 ( page 100) up the head restraint supports the back of the
( page 38). and unfold backrest until it locks into head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-
place. tial for injury to the head and neck in the
Move rear seat forward ( page 100).
The red backrest lock indicator at lock event of an accident or similar situation.
Push head restraint fully down and tilt
button 1 ( page 100) is not visible in Failure to assure that seats are locked into
it forward.
the locked position. place could result in an increased chance of
Fold backrest forward ( page 100). injury in an accident.
Check for secure locking by pulling and
Pull lever 1 up and fold the rear seat pushing on the backrest. Never place hands under seat or near any
forward. moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.

102
Controls in detail
Seats

Folding down single seat Attach belt at hook and loop fastener Install head restraint 1 in backrest
strip 4 ( page 103) on underside of ( page 103).
seat.
Storing single seat

1 Head restraint
2 Hook
3 Tensioner 5 Backrest release
4 Hook and loop fastener strip 6 Seat release Remove head restraint from backrest
( page 103).
Remove cargo floor plate Fold seat down until it locks securely in
( page 165). place. Pull backrest release 5 and fold back-
rest forward until it locks securely in
Remove head restraint 1 from seat The red marking on the seat release 6
place.
cushion. should not be visible.
Remove cargo floor plates from the
Lift tensioner 3 upward to a horizon- Store cargo floor plates inside the
backrest.
tal position to release tension of the backrest ( page 165).
belt. Pull seat release 6 ( page 103) and
Pull backrest release 5 and unfold
fold seat up.
Disengage hook 2 while holding onto backrest until it locks securely in place.
the seat firmly with one hand.

103
Controls in detail
Seats

Disengage belt and engage hook 2 Removing single seat Lift tensioner 2 upward to a horizon-
( page 103) in ceiling mount. tal position to release tension of the
belt.
Pull on free end of belt until tight.
Disengage hook 1 while holding onto
Install head restraint in openings
the seat firmly with one hand.
provided in seat cushion.
Attach belt at hook and loop fastener
Install cargo floor plates ( page 165).
strip 3 on underside of seat.

Warning! G Move release lever 4 upward and re-
move seat.
After folding the seats up, manually place
1 Hook Installing single seat
the lap belt portion of the seat belt behind
2 Tensioner
the seat (arrow). Otherwise, the lap belt may Place seat into the mounting clamps
3 Hook and loop fastener strip
be subject to damage and could rip. and click the seat into place.
4 Release lever

104
Controls in detail
Memory function*
Memory function*
! With the memory button you can store up
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driv- to three different settings for the driver-
er should check and adjust the seat and passenger seat.
height, seat position fore and aft, and Together with the drivers seat you can
seat backrest angle if necessary, to store the exterior rear view mirrors.
ensure adequate control, reach and
For the front passenger seat you can store
comfort. The head restraint should also
the seat position.
be adjusted for proper height. See also
the section on airbags ( page 59) for
proper seat positioning. Warning! G
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
Do not activate the memory function while
ensure adequate control, reach, opera-
driving. Activating the memory function
tion and comfort. Both the interior and
while driving could cause the driver to lose
exterior rear view mirrors should be ad-
control of the vehicle.
justed for adequate rear vision. 1 Position button
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small 2 Memory button
children should be seated in a properly Switch on ignition ( page 33).
secured restraint system that complies
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 and 225 and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
and 210.2.

105
Controls in detail
Memory function*

Storing positions into memory Press and hold one of the position Storing parking position
buttons 1 until seat and rear view mir-
Stop the vehicle.
Adjust the seat ( page 38) and exteri- rors have fully moved to the stored po-
or rear view mirrors ( page 41) to the sitions. Switch on ignition ( page 33).
desired position. Press button 2.
i
Push memory button 2 ( page 105).
Releasing the button immediately The passenger-side exterior rear view
Release memory button and press one stops movement to the stored posi- mirror is selected.
of the position buttons 1 within three tions. Adjust the exterior rear view mirror
seconds. with button 3 so that you see the rear
All the settings are stored at the select- Storing exterior rear view mirror wheel and the road curb.
ed position. parking position Press memory button 2 ( page 105).
Recalling positions from memory For easier parking, you can adjust the pas- Within three seconds, press bottom of
senger-side exterior rear view mirror so adjustment button 3.
! that you can see the right rear wheel as The parking position is stored if the
soon as you engage reverse gear R. mirror does not move.
Do not operate the power seats using
the memory button if the seat backrest For information on activating the parking
is in an excessively reclined position. position feature, see Activating exterior i
Doing so could cause damage to front rear view mirror parking position If the mirror does move, repeat the
or rear seats. ( page 129). above steps. After the setting is stored
you can move the mirror again.
The selected position will be stored rel-
ative to the position button 1
( page 105) pressed.

106
Controls in detail
Lighting
Lighting
For information on how to switch on the Combination switch D Off
headlamps and use the turn signals, see Daytime running lamp mode
the Getting started section ( page 50). The combination switch is on the left of the (Canada only) ( page 109)
steering column.
i U Automatic headlamp mode
Daytime running lamp mode
If you drive in countries where vehicles
(Canada only) ( page 109)
drive on the other side of the road than
the country in which the vehicle is reg- C Parking lamps (also tail lamps, li-
istered, you must have the headlamps cense plate lamps, side marker
modified for symmetrical low beams. lamps, instrument panel lamps)
Relevant information can be obtained Low beam headlamps (or high
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz beam headlamps when the combi-
Light Truck Center. nation switch is pushed forward)
and parking lamps
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher Left or right standing lamps
(symbol on underside of switch)

107
Controls in detail
Lighting

i
With the key removed from the steering
Warning! G The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
lock and the drivers door open, a warn- the operation of the vehicles lights at all
If the combination switch is set to U
ing sounds if the parking lamps or low times.
beam headlamps are switched on the headlamps may switch off unexpect-
( page 107). edly when the system senses bright am-
Turn the combination switch to
bient light, for example light from
oncoming traffic. position U.
Manual headlamp mode
the headlamps will not be automatically With the key in steering lock position 1
The low beam headlamps and the parking switched on under foggy conditions. only the parking lamps will switch on
lamps can be switched on and off with the To minimize risk to you and to others, acti- and off automatically.
combination switch. vate headlamps by turning combination With the engine is running, the low
switch to when driving or when traffic beam headlamps, the tail and parking
Automatic headlamp mode and/or ambient lighting conditions require lamps, the license plate lamps, and the
The following lamps switch on and off au- you to do so. side marker lamps will switch on and
tomatically depending on the brightness of In low ambient lighting conditions, only off automatically.
the ambient light. switch from position U to with the They will be switched on constantly,
Low beam headlamps vehicle at a standstill. Switching when you switch on the front fog
from U to will briefly switch off the lamps.
Tail and parking lamps
headlamps. Doing so while driving in low
License plate lamps ambient lighting conditions may result in an
accident.
Side marker lamps

108
Controls in detail
Lighting

Daytime running lamp mode When the engine is running, and you Night security illumination
Canada only: turn the combination switch to Use this function to set wether and how
position C, the parking lamps long you would like the exterior lamps to il-
Turn combination switch to
switch on additionally. luminate during darkness after exiting the
position D or U.
vehicle and all doors closed.
turn the combination switch to
When the engine is running, the low When a time is set for the night security il-
beam headlamps are switched on. position , the manual headlamp
lumination and the combination switch is
mode has priority over the daytime run-
In low ambient light conditions, the fol- set to position Ubefore turning off the
ning lamp mode.
lowing lamps will switch on additional- engine, the following lamps will come on
The corresponding exterior lamps after you have removed the key from the
ly:
switch on ( page 107). steering lock:
Tail and parking lamps
i Tail and parking lamps
License plate lamps
With the daytime running lamp mode License plate lamps
Side marker lamp and the combination switch in
Side marker lamps
For nighttime driving you should turn the position D, the high beam head-
combination switch to position to lamps cannot be switched on. Front fog lamps
permit activation of the high beam head- The high beam flasher is always avail-
lamps.
i
able. You can reactivate this function within
When the engine is running, and you shift ten minutes by opening a door.
from a driving position to position N or P,
the low beam headlamps will switch off If you do not open a door or do not
with a three minutes delay. close an opened door after turning off
the engine, the lamps will automatically
switch off after 60 seconds.

109
Controls in detail
Lighting

Setting illumination time Release fog lamps switch 1. Deactivating night security illumination
temporarily
Press the upper part of fog lamps
switch 1 again. You can temporarily deactivate the
delayed shut-off feature.
Each time the switch is pressed, the
illumination time increases by Before exiting the vehicle, turn the key
15 seconds. You can set the illumina- in the steering lock to position 0.
tion time between 0 (off) and Then turn it to position 2 and back to
60 seconds. position 0.
The time is factory-set to 0 seconds.
The delayed shut-off feature is deacti-
Approximately five seconds after vated. It will reactivate as soon as you
1 Fog lamps switch
pressing the switch, the illumination reinsert the key in the steering lock.
Switch on ignition ( page 33). time is adopted and the clock is dis-
Turn combination switch to played again.
position D. Turn the combination switch to
Press and hold the upper part of fog position U before turning off the en-
lamps switch 1 until the clock in the gine ( page 107).
instrument cluster displays the actual The night security illumination is acti-
illumination time. vated.

110
Controls in detail
Lighting

Locator lighting High beam Fog lamps


With the locator lighting feature activated, Turn the combination switch to
the following lamps will switch on when the position or U ( page 107).
vehicle is unlocked by remote control dur-
Warning! G
Push the combination switch in direc-
ing darkness:
tion of arrow 1 to switch on the high In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
Tail and parking lamps beam ( page 107). only switch from position U to with
the vehicle at a standstill. Switching
License plate lamps The high beam headlamp indicator
from U to will briefly switch off the
lamp A in the instrument cluster
Side marker lamps headlamps. Doing so while driving in low
comes on.
Front fog lamps ambient lighting conditions may result in an
Pull the combination switch in direction accident.
Additional lamps in the exterior rear of arrow 2 to its original position to
view mirrors. switch off the high beam.
i
The locator lighting switches off when the The high beam indicator lamp A in Fog lamps will operate with the parking
drivers door is opened. the instrument cluster goes out. lamps and/or low beam headlamps
If you do not open a door after unlocking on. Fog lamps should only be used in
by remote control the lamps will switch off High beam flasher conjunction with low beam headlamps.
automatically after of approximately Pull the combination switch briefly in Consult your State or Province Motor
40 seconds. direction of arrow 2 ( page 107). Vehicle Regulations regarding permis-
Turn the combination switch to sible lamp operation.
position U when exiting the vehicle
( page 107).
The locator lighting is activated.

111
Controls in detail
Lighting

Front fog lamps Front and rear fog lamps


Switch the low beam headlamps on Switch the low beam headlamps on
( page 107). ( page 107).
Press upper part 1 of the fog lamps Press lower part 3 of the fog lamps
switch. switch.
The front fog lamps are switched on. The front and rear fog lamps are
switched on.
The green indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster comes on. The green indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster and the yellow indi-
1 Front fog lamps Press upper part 1 of the fog lamps
cator lamp 2 in the fog lamps switch
2 Indicator lamp switch again.
come on.
3 Front fog lamps and rear fog lamp The front fog lamps switch off.
Press lower part 3 of the fog lamps
i The green indicator lamp in the switch again.
When switching on the front fog lamps, instrument cluster goes out.
The front and rear fog lamps switch off.
the low beam headlamps, the tail and
parking lamps, the license plate lamps The green indicator lamp in the
and the side marker lamps are also instrument cluster and the yellow indi-
switched on when cator lamp 2 in the fog lamps switch
go out.
the combination switch is set to
position U
the ignition is switched on or the
engine is running

112
Controls in detail
Lighting

Switching off the rear fog lamp separately Hazard warning flasher Switching on hazard warning flasher
when both, the front and rear fog lamps
Press the hazard warning flasher
are switched on: The hazard warning flasher can be
switch.
switched on at all times, even with the key
Press upper part 1 of the fog lamps
removed from the steering lock. All turn signals will flash.
switch.
The hazard warning flasher switches on au- i
The rear fog lamp switches off.
tomatically when an airbag deploys.
With the hazard warning flasher acti-
The yellow indicator lamp 2 in the fog
The hazard warning flasher switch is locat- vated and the combination switch set
lamp switch goes out.
ed on the top of the steering column. for either left or right turn, only the re-
The front fog lamps remain lit. spective turn signals will operate when
the ignition is switched on ( page 33).

Switching off hazard warning flasher


Press the hazard warning flasher
switch again.

i
If the hazard warning flasher has been
activated automatically, press the haz-
Hazard warning flasher switch
ard warning flasher switch once to
switch it off.

113
Controls in detail
Lighting

Interior lighting Automatic control Deactivating


Press lower part 3 of the interior
The controls are located in the overhead Activating
lighting switch.
control panel.
Press the interior lighting switch to
The interior lighting remain switched
center position 4.
off in darkness, even when you:
The interior lighting (except cargo com- unlock the vehicle
partment lamps) switches on in dark-
ness, when you: remove the key from the steering
lock
unlock the vehicle
open a door
remove the key from the steering
lock
open a door
Interior lighting switch
The interior lighting switches off automati-
1 Left front interior lamp lens cally after a brief delay when all doors are
2 Right front interior lamp lens closed and no key is inserted in the steer-
3 Automatic control off ing lock.
4 Automatic control on
5 Rear interior lighting i
If the door remains open, the interior
i lighting switches off automatically after
An interior lamp switched on manually approximately 30 minutes.
does not go out automatically. This
could cause the battery to become dis-
charged.

114
Controls in detail
Lighting

Manual control Operating rear interior lighting with Reading lamps


lamp lens
i
With the key in the steering lock
position 0 or removed, the interior
lighting can be switched on for up to
30 minutes.

Front interior lighting


Press front interior lamp lens 1 or 2.
The corresponding front interior lamp 1 Reading lamp
switches on. Rear interior lighting 2 Reading lamp on/off
Press respective front interior lamp Press gently on lamp lens in direction Press reading lamp button 2 to switch
lens 1 or 2 again. of arrow to switch the rear interior the desired reading lamp on or off.
lighting on or off.
The corresponding front interior lamp
switches off.

Rear interior lighting


Press upper part 5 of the interior
lighting switch to switch the rear interi-
or lighting on or off.

115
Controls in detail
Lighting

Cargo compartment lamp Switched on continuously Automatic control


Slide the cargo compartment lamp Slide the cargo compartment lamp
switch to position 2. switch to position 3.
The cargo compartment lamp is The cargo compartment lamp switches
switched on continuously. on when you open the liftgate.

i It switches off when you close the lift-


gate.
When leaving the vehicle, make sure
the cargo compartment lamp switch is
not in position 2 to prevent the vehi-
1 Switched off cle battery from being discharged.
2 Switched on
3 Automatic control

Switched off continuously


Slide the cargo compartment lamp
switch to position 1.
The cargo compartment lamp is
switched off continuously.

116
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
For a full view illustration of the instrument The instrument cluster is activated when Instrument cluster illumination
cluster, see the At a glance section you:
( page 24). i
open the drivers door
You can set the instrument cluster illu-
switch on ignition ( page 33)
mination with the following lamps on:
press the left knob 1
parking lamps
low beam headlamps
high beam headlamps

To brighten illumination
Turn knob 1 clockwise.
1 Left knob
The instrument cluster illumination will
2 Right knob
brighten.

To dim illumination
Turn knob 1 counterclockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
dim.

117
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster

Coolant temperature gauge Display in the speedometer


Warning! G
Under normal driving conditions, the cool-
ant temperature may rise to 248F Driving when your engine is badly overheat- Changing display
(120C). The coolant temperature may ed can cause some fluids which may have Press the left knob 1 in the instru-
climb to the red marking: leaked into the engine compartment to ment cluster ( page 117).
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
at high outside temperatures The display changes between main
Steam from an overheated engine can cause odometer and trip odometer.
during stop-and-go city traffic serious burns and can occur just by opening
Press the left knob 1 twice.
when driving on hilly terrain the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it. The next scheduled service is displayed
The engine should not be operated with
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle ( page 237).
the coolant temperature in the red zone.
Doing so may cause serious engine dam- and do not stand near the vehicle until the
age which is not covered by the engine has cooled down.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

118
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster

Resetting trip odometer Outside temperature indicator Setting the clock

Press the left knob 1 ( page 117) re-


peatedly until you see the trip odome- Warning! G Hour
ter display. Pull out the right knob 2 in the instru-
The outside temperature indicator is not de- ment cluster ( page 117) and turn it
Press and hold the left knob 1 until
signed to serve as an ice-warning device and counterclockwise.
the trip odometer is reset.
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freez- Minutes
Tachometer
ing point do not guarantee that the road sur- Pull out the right knob 2 in the instru-
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply face is free of ice. The road may still be icy, ment cluster ( page 117) and turn it
is interrupted if the engine is operated especially in wooded areas or on bridges. clockwise.
above its specified limit.
The outside temperature is displayed in
i
the instrument cluster ( page 24). To set the clock by a single hour or a
few minutes, turn knob 2 just a few
When moving the vehicle into colder ambi- degrees in the direction indicated for
ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your hours or minutes.
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
perature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.

119
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

For information on driving with an auto- The automatic transmission selects indi-
matic transmission, see the Getting vidual gears automatically, depending on: Warning! G
started section ( page 47).
the gear selector lever position D with It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
Your vehicles transmission adapts its gear gear ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 ( page 122) lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
shifting process to your individual driving
the position of the accelerator pedal higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
style by continually adjusting the shift
( page 124) firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
points up or down. These shift point adjust- accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You
ments are performed based on current the vehicle speed
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
operating and driving conditions. The current gear selector lever position someone or something. Only shift into gear
If the operating conditions change, the appears in the tachometer display when the engine is idling normally and when
automatic transmission reacts by ( page 24). your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
adjusting its gear shift program.
When the gear selector lever is in
i
position D, you can influence transmission
During the brief warm-up, transmission shifting by
upshifting is delayed. This allows the
catalytic converter to heat up more limiting the gear range
quickly to operating temperature. changing gears manually

120
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

One-touch gearshifting i Canceling gear range limit


To avoid overrevving the engine when Press and hold the gear selector lever
Even with an automatic transmission you
the gear selector lever is moved to in the D+ direction until D reappears in
can change the gears manually when the
the D direction, the transmission will the tachometer display.
gear selector lever is in position D.
not shift to a lower gear if the engines
The transmission will shift from the current
max. speed would be exceeded.
Downshifting gear range directly to gear range D.
Briefly press the gear selector lever to Upshifting Shifting into optimal gear range
the left in the D direction.
Briefly press the gear selector lever to Press and hold the gear selector lever
The transmission will shift from the current the right in the D+ direction. in the D direction.
gear to the next lower gear. This action
simultaneously limits the gear range of the The transmission will shift from the current The transmission will automatically select
transmission ( page 122). gear to the next higher gear as permitted the gear range suited for optimal
by the shift program. This action simulta- acceleration and deceleration. This will
neously extends the gear range of the involve shifting down one or more gears.
Warning! G transmission.

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift


in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicles ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.

121
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Gear ranges Effect Effect


With the gear selector lever in position D, The transmission shifts through The transmission shifts through
you can limit the transmissions gear range fourth gear only. second gear only.
by pressing the gear selector lever to the The transmission shifts through Allows the use of engines
left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit third gear only. braking power when driving:
by pressing the gear selector lever to the
With this selection you can use on steep downgrades
right (D+).
the braking effect of the engine.
in mountainous regions
The selected gear range appears in the
tachometer display. If you press on the under extreme operating
accelerator when the engine has reached conditions
its rpm limit, the transmission will upshift The transmission operates in
beyond any gear range limit selected. first gear only.
For maximum use of engines
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.

122
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Gear selector lever position Effect Effect


The key can only be removed Neutral
Effect from the steering lock with the
No power is transmitted from the
Park position gear selector lever in position P.
engine to the drive axle. When
With the key removed, the gear
Gear selector lever position the brakes are released, the
selector lever is locked in
when the vehicle is parked. Place vehicle can be moved freely
position P.
gear selector lever in position P (pushed or towed).
only when vehicle is stopped. If the vehicles electrical system To avoid damage to the trans-
The park position is not intended is malfunctioning, the gear mission, never engage N while
to serve as a brake when the selector lever could remain driving.
vehicle is parked. Rather, the locked in position P
driver should always set the ( page 270). If the ESP is deactivated or
malfunctioning:
parking brake in addition to Reverse gear Move gear selector lever to N
placing the gear selector lever in
position P to secure the vehicle. Place gear selector lever in only if the vehicle is in danger of
position R only when vehicle is skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
stopped. Drive
The transmission shifts
automatically. All five forward
gears are available.

123
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

! Driving tips
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any Warning! G
other reason with gear selector lever Accelerator position
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
in N can result in transmission damage
bustible materials such as grass, hay or Your driving style influences the
that is not covered by the
leaves can come into contact with the hot transmissions shifting behavior:
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
exhaust system, as these materials could be
Less throttle Earlier upshifting
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
More throttle Later upshifting
Warning! G
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear Warning! G Kickdown
selector lever not fully engaged in position P Use kickdown when you want maximum
is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not When leaving the vehicle, always remove the acceleration.
intended to or capable of preventing your key from the steering lock, take it with you
and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children Press the accelerator past the point of
vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people resistance.
or objects. unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Children could move The transmission shifts into a lower
Always set the parking brake in addition to the gear selector lever from position P, gear.
shifting to position P ( page 54). which could result in an accident and/or
Ease on the accelerator when you have
When parked on an incline, turn the front serious personal injury.
reached the desired speed.
wheels towards the road curb.
The transmission shifts up again.

124
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Stopping Maneuvering Towing a trailer


When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights: When you maneuver in tight areas,
If you tow a trailer, note the following
e.g. when pulling into a parking space:
Leave the transmission in gear. points:
Control the vehicle speed by gradually
Hold the vehicle with the brake. Manually shift to a lower gear range
releasing the brakes.
When you stop longer with the engine (4, 3, 2, 1), if the transmission hunts
Accelerate gently. between gears on inclines
idling or on an uphill gradient:
Never abruptly step on the accelerator. ( page 122).
Move the gear selector lever to
position P. A lower gear range and reduction of
Working on the vehicle speed reduces the change to overload
Set the parking brake. or overheat the engine.
Warning! G At very steep inclines switch transfer
case to LOW RANGE mode
When working on the vehicle, set the ( page 127).
parking brake and move gear selector lever
For more information on trailer towing, see
to position P. Otherwise the vehicle could
the Operation section ( page 211).
roll away.

125
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Emergency operation (Limp Home


Mode)

If vehicle acceleration worsens or the


transmission no longer shifts, the trans-
mission is most likely operating in limp
home (emergency operation) mode. In this
mode only second gear and reverse gear
can be activated.
Stop the vehicle.
Move gear selector lever to position P.
Turn off the engine.
Wait at least ten seconds before
restarting.
Restart the engine.
Move selector lever to position D
(for second gear) or R.
Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.

126
Controls in detail
Transmission control LOW RANGE mode
Transmission control LOW RANGE mode
In the following situations you should ! Press on the upper part of the switch.
switch to LOW RANGE mode: You should only operate the vehicle on During the changeover the indicator
during off-road driving a single axle dynamometer for briefly lamp ( page 25) flashes three times.
testing the brakes.
when crossing water Once the changeover is complete, the
The key must be in steering lock indicator lamp comes on continuously.
when towing up or down on steep
position 1 ( page 33).
gradients
Switching off LOW RANGE mode
! Switching on LOW RANGE mode
Stop the vehicle.
Only switch the LOW RANGE mode on
or off, when the vehicle is Move the gear selector lever to
at a complete standstill position N.
Press on the upper part of the switch.
the engine speed is less than
1500 rpm During the changeover the indicator
Failure to do so may result in transmis- lamp ( page 25) flashes three times.
sion or engine damage which is not Once the changeover is complete, the
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited indicator lamp goes out.
Warranty.
For information on driving safety systems
LOW RANGE mode switch
during LOW RANGE mode, see the Safety
Stop the vehicle. and Security section ( page 76).
Move the gear selector lever to
position N.

127
Controls in detail
Good visibility

For more information, see Windshield Tilt the mirror to the antiglare night po-
wipers ( page 51) and Mirrors sition by moving lever 1 towards the Warning! G
( page 41). windshield.
The automatic antiglare function does not
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed. react if incoming light is not aimed directly
Rear view mirrors
at sensors in the interior rear view mirror.
Automatic antiglare rear view mirrors*
Interior rear view mirror, antiglare The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
The reflection brightness of the exterior rear view mirror on the drivers side do not
position rear view mirror on the drivers side and react, for example, if the cargo compart-
the interior rear view mirror will respond ment is fully loaded.
automatically to glare when:
Glare can endanger you and others.
the automatic antiglare function is acti-
vated ( page 129)
the ignition is switched on Warning! G
incoming light from headlamps falls on
In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte
the sensor in the interior rear view
may escape from the mirror housing if the
mirror
mirror glass breaks.
1 Lever The rear view mirror will not react if Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
reverse gear is engaged low the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
the interior light is turned on
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.

128
Controls in detail
Good visibility

Activating Activating exterior rear view mirror


Warning! G parking position

Exercise care when using the passen- The buttons are located on the lower part
ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror of the center console.
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your in-
terior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.

! 1 Button
Electrolyte drops coming into contact 2 Indicator lamp
with the vehicle paint finish can be Press button 1.
completely removed only while in the 1 Deactivating parking position
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
liquid state and by applying plenty of 2 Activating parking position
water. 3 Adjustment button
Deactivating
Make sure you have stored a parking
Press button 1 again.
position for the passenger-side exterior
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. rear view mirror ( page 106).
Switch on ignition ( page 33).
Press button 2 for the passenger-side
exterior rear view mirror.

129
Controls in detail
Good visibility

Place the gear selector lever in reverse Electrically folding exterior rear view The buttons are located on the lower part
gear R. mirrors of the center console.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror will be turned downward to the !
stored position. Before driving the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, fold the exterior
The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
mirrors in. Otherwise they may get
previously stored driving position:
damaged.
ten seconds after you put the gear
selector lever in position D Folding exterior mirrors in and out
immediately once you exceed a vehicle manually*
speed of approx. 6 mph (10 km/h) The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if 1 Folds the exterior mirrors in
immediately when you press the they are not completely folded out. 2 Folds the exterior mirrors out
button 1 for drivers side mirror
Switch on ignition ( page 33).
i i
If the button 1 is pressed, the auto-
With the front doors closed, the exteri-
matic passenger-side exterior rear view
or mirrors can still be folded in and out
parking position is deactivated.
approximately 30 minutes after the ig-
nition has been turned off.

130
Controls in detail
Good visibility

Folding in Folding out Windshield wipers


Briefly press button 1 ( page 130). Briefly press button 2.
For more information on the windshield
The mirrors fold in. The mirrors fold out. wipers, see the Getting started section
( page 51).
! !
Before you drive the vehicle through an If an exterior rear view mirror housing !
automatic car wash, fold the exterior is forcibly pushed forward (hit from the If leaves, snow, etc. block the wind-
mirrors in, otherwise they may get rear), reposition it manually by applying shield wipers, the wiper motor turns
damaged. firm pressure until it snaps back into off.
place.
For safety reasons, withdraw key
i If an exterior rear view mirror is forcibly from steering lock. Remove block-
If you are driving at more than approxi- pushed rearward (hit from the front) age.
mately 9 mph (15 km/h), you will not press button 1 to fold mirrors in, then
Turn the windshield wipers on
able to fold the exterior mirrors in. press button 2 to fold mirrors out. Do
again.
not force mirrors by hand as this may
damage the adjustment mechanism. If windshield wipers fail to function at
all in switch position 1,
The mirror housing is now properly po-
sitioned and you can adjust the mirror set the wiper switch to the next
normally. highest wiper speed.
have the windshield wipers
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

131
Controls in detail
Good visibility

Intermittent wiping Windshield wipers with rain sensor* !


A rain sensor automatically controls the Do not leave windshield wipers in inter-
i
windshield wipers depending on how wet mittent setting when the vehicle is tak-
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when en to an automatic car wash or during
the windshield is.
the vehicle is at a standstill and a front windshield cleaning. Wipers will oper-
door is opened. Switch on ignition.
ate in the presence of water sprayed on
Set the wiper switch to position 1 the windshield, and wipers may be
Windshield wipers without rain sensor* ( page 51). damaged as a result.
At speeds of approximately 105 mph After the initial wipe, pauses between The switch should not be left in inter-
(170 km/h) the wiper switches automati- wipes are automatically controlled by the mittent setting as the wipers will wipe
cally to continuous wiping. Always obey lo- rain sensor which monitors the wetness of the windshield once every time the en-
cal speed limits. windshield. gine is started. Dust that accumulates
on the windshield might scratch the
i glass and/or damage the wiper blades
When intermittent wiping is on and the when wiping occurs on a dry wind-
key is turned from position 1 to shield.
position 2 in the steering lock
( page 33), and kept in that position
for longer than two seconds, the wipe
interval will be set to approximately
five seconds.

132
Controls in detail
Good visibility

Headlamp cleaning system* For information on filling up the washer Rear window wiper with rain sensor*
reservoir, see the Operation section
Rear window wiper intervals are controlled
The button is located on the right side of ( page 230).
automatically according to the amount of
the dashboard.
water on the windshield and the speed of
Rear window wiper
the vehicle, if:
For more information on Rear window wip- rear window wiper is switched on
er, see the Getting started section front windshield wipers are switched to
( page 52). intermittent wiping
The rear window wiper will also automati- The interval for the rear window wiper re-
cally engage if the windshield wiper is en- mains constant when the windshield wiper
gaged and the gear selector lever is placed interval is ten seconds or more.
in reverse.
Headlamp washer button
Switch on ignition.
Briefly press the upper part of button.
The headlamps will be cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.

133
Controls in detail
Good visibility

Sun visors Illuminated vanity mirrors

The sun visors protect you from sun glare


while driving.

Warning! G
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare 1 Mirror cover
can endanger you and others. 2 Mounting Turn the key in steering lock to
Swing sun visors down when you expe- position 1 ( page 33).
rience glare. Lift cover up.
To use mirror, lift cover 1 up. The lamp switches on.

i
If sunlight enters through a side win-
dow, disengage sun visor from
mounting 2 and pivot to the side.

134
Controls in detail
Good visibility

Rear window defroster


Warning! G
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
drain to a minimum, switch off the defrost- removed from the rear window before driv-
er as soon as the rear window is clear. The ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
defroster is automatically deactivated endangering you and others.
after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of
operation depending on the outside tem- !
perature.
If the rear window defroster switches
off too soon and the indicator lamp
Activating
starts flashing, this means that too
Switch ignition on. many electrical consumers are operat-
Press button F ( page 137). ing simultaneously and there is insuffi-
cient voltage in the battery. The system
The indicator lamp on the button responds automatically by deactivating
comes on. the rear window defroster.

Deactivating As soon as the battery has sufficient


voltage, the rear window defroster au-
Press button F again. tomatically turns itself back on.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.

135
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

136
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Item Item
1 Thumbwheel for center air vent 1 Air volume control
2 Center air vent, adjustable 2 Defrosting
3 Defroster air vent windshield 3 Air recirculation
4 Thumbwheels for side air vent 4 Temperature control
5 Side air vent, adjustable 5 Automatic control (temperature, air
6 Footwell air vent distribution, air volume)

7 Automatic climate control 6 AC cooling on/off (ACOFF)


Automatic climate control panel in the front
Residual heat/ventilation (REST)
7 Interior temperature sensor
8 Air distribution control
9 Rear window defroster
a Rear passenger compartment venti-
lation on/off

137
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

The automatic climate control is operation- i


Always keep sufficient distance between un-
al whenever the engine is running. You can Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollu-
protected parts of the body and the footwell
operate the climate control system in ei- tion) may require replacement of the fil-
air vents. If necessary, change the air flow
ther the automatic or manual mode. The ter before its scheduled interval. A
using the air distribution controls to direct
system cools or heats the interior depend- clogged filter will reduce the air volume
the air away from the footwell air vents
ing on the selected interior temperature to the interior.
( page 140).
and the current outside temperature.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and the interior before driving off.
odors are filtered out before outside air en- Warning! G
ters the passenger compartment through Keep the air intake grille in front of the
the air distribution system. Follow the recommended settings for heat- windshield free of snow and debris.
ing and cooling given on the following pag- Do not touch the interior temperature
Warning! G es. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
sensor to maintain a precise tempera-
ture.
others.
When operating the automatic climate con- The set value is indicated by a lighted
trol, the air that enters the passenger com- segment on the control wheels.
partment through the air vents in the
footwell can be very hot or very cold (de-
pending on the set temperature). This may
cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin
in the immediate area of the air vents.

138
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Automatic mode Activating basic setting Adjusting air volume and air distribu-
tion manually
Press button U at least
Switching on three seconds.
i
Briefly press button U All functions are switched to automatic
If you turn air volume control 1 or air
( page 137). mode and temperature is set to 72F
distribution control 8 ( page 137),
(22C).
The indicator lamp comes on. The tem- the automatic mode switches off. The
perature, air volume and distribution indicator lamp in the button U goes
Changing basic setting
are controlled automatically. out. The temperature control will still
Set temperature control 4 be in automatic mode.
Adjust the temperature with the tem-
( page 137) to desired temperature.
perature control 4 ( page 137).
Press button U for ten seconds. Adjusting air volume
Temperature control is switched off in
the extreme position (blue or red dot). The selected temperature value is Turn air volume control 1 to one of
stored and set. five air volume settings.
Switching off
i i
Briefly press button U When set to 0 the system is fully deac-
Adjust temperature settings in small
( page 137). tivated and no fresh air is supplied. This
increments.
The indicator lamp goes out. The auto- setting should only be selected for
matic mode is switched off. short periods of time.
Air volume control 1 is set to fan
speed 2 and air distribution is set
to V.

139
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Adjusting air distribution Defrosting Air recirculation mode


Turn air distribution control 8
i Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
( page 137) to one the following
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
symbols: These settings should only be selected
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
for a short time.
intake of outside air and recirculates the
Symbol Function
When the defrost setting has been se- air in the passenger compartment.
h Directs air to the center lected, only the rear window defroster
and side air vents can be switched on. No other settings
Warning! G
j Directs air to the wind- are possible.
shield and side air vents When the outside temperature is below
V Directs air into the en- Activating 41F (5C), only switch to air recirculation
tire vehicle interior Press button P ( page 137). mode for short periods to prevent window
fogging.
k Directs air to the foot- The indicator lamp on the button P
wells and side air vents comes on.

Windshield fogged on the outside Deactivating


Switch the windshield wipers on, Press button P again.
( page 51). or
Turn air distribution control 8 to h Press button U ( page 137).
or k.
The indicator lamp on the button P
goes out.

140
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Activating i Deactivating
Press button ( page 137). The air recirculation mode is It is possible to deactivate the air condi-
deactivated automatically tioning (cooling) function of the automatic
The indicator lamp on the button
after 30 minutes if the automatic climate control system. The air in the vehi-
comes on.
climate control is switched on cle will then no longer be cooled or dehu-
i midified.
after five minutes if the air condi-
To achieve the fastest possible cooling
tioning is switched off Press button ( page 137).
of the interior, the automatic climate
after five minutes if the outside The indicator lamp on the button
control automatically switches to air
temperature is above approximate- comes on.
recirculation. The indicator lamp in the
button is not illuminated when ly 45F (7C)
Activating
the system automatically switches to
air recirculation. Air conditioning Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air condition-
Deactivating The air conditioning is operational while ing.
the engine is running and cools the interior
Press button ( page 137). Press button again.
air to the temperature set by the operator.
The indicator lamp on the button The indicator lamp on the button
goes out. i goes out.
Condensation may drip out from under- The air conditioning system uses the refrig-
neath the vehicle. This is normal and erant R-134a. This refrigerant is free of
not an indication of a malfunction. CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer.

141
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

! Residual heat and ventilation Deactivating


If the button on the automatic Press button .
climate control panel starts to flash, With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior The indicator lamp on button
this indicates that the air conditioning
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes goes out.
system is losing refrigerant. The com-
pressor has turned itself off. The air use of the residual heat produced by the
engine. i
conditioning cannot be turned on
The residual heat is automatically
again. i turned off:
Have the air conditioning system How long the system will provide heat- when the ignition is switched on
checked at the nearest authorized ing depends on the coolant tempera-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. ture and the temperature set by the after about 30 minutes
operator. The blower will run at lower if the coolant temperature is too
speed regardless of the air volume con- low
trol setting.
if the battery voltage drops
Activating
Turn the key in the steering lock to
position 0 or 1 ( page 33).
Press button ( page 137).
The indicator lamp on button
comes on.

142
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Rear passenger compartment ventila- Automatic mode Adjusting air volume and air distribu-
tion and rear automatic climate control tion manually
The automatic climate control panel for the
rear is located on the rear center console. i
Deactivating
When the air volume or air distribution
For an improved cooling or heating output control is pressed, the automatic mode
in the front passenger compartment, you is switched off. The indicator lamp in
can switch off the rear passenger compart- button U is turned off. Temperature
ment ventilation. setting remains in automatic mode.
Press button ( page 137).
Adjusting air volume
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. Press upper part of button R.
The operation of the rear automatic The blower setting is increased each
1 Air volume control time the button is pressed.
climate control and the fresh air supply 2 Air distribution control
to the rear compartment is shut off. 3 Automatic control (air distribution, air Press lower part of button R.
volume) The blower setting is decreased each
Activating
Press button U. time the button is pressed.
Press button again.
The indicator lamp on the button U
The indicator lamp on the button comes on.
goes out.
The automatic climate control cools or
The rear automatic climate control heats the interior depending on the
switches to automatic mode and fresh temperature selected on the front
air enters the rear compartment. climate control unit.

143
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

i Adjusting air distribution Adjusting side air vents


When in manual mode, the rear blower Press upper part of button . Turn thumbwheel 4 ( page 137) to
setting cannot be increased beyond one of the following positions:
Air is directed upwards.
the setting for the front blower setting.
For example, if the driver or front pas- Press lower part of button . Symbol Function
senger changes the blower setting to Air is directed to the footwell. h Open
level 3, the rear blower will not go high-
er than level 3 as well. l Ventilation of side
Front and rear air vents windows in area of
The rear air volume control position in- exterior mirror
dicator lights may not always reflect i
the actual fan speed. M Closed
For draft-free ventilation, adjust the air
vents upwards.
To allow unrestricted operation of the
automatic climate control, the air vents
should remain open.

144
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Center air vents Rear passenger compartment air vents

Opening
Turn thumbwheel for center air vent 1
( page 137) upward to position h.

Closing
Turn thumbwheel for center air vent 1
downward to position M.
Use the left thumbwheel to adjust the cen-
ter air vents on the left and in the center. 1 Left center air vent, adjustable
Use the right thumbwheel to adjust the 2 Right center air vent, adjustable
right center air vent.
i
The temperature at the air vents for the
rear passenger compartment is the
same as at the dashboard center air
vents.

145
Controls in detail
Power windows

Opening and closing the side windows Additional switches for the rear windows
If the window encounters an obstruction
are located on the rear center console.
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
The side windows can be opened and
you pressed the switch past the resistance
closed electrically. The switches for all the
point and released it to close the window,
side windows are on the drivers door. The
the automatic reversal function will stop the
switches for the respective windows are
window and open it slightly.
on the passenger door and on the rear cen-
ter console. If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing the window by pressing and
holding the switch, the automatic reversal
function will not operate.
6 Left rear window When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
7 Right rear window key from the steering lock, and lock your ve-
hicle. Do not leave children unattended in
Warning! G the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
When closing the windows, make sure that ment can cause an accident and/or serious
1 Left front window personal injury.
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
2 Right front window
by the closing procedure.
3 Right rear window Switch on ignition ( page 33).
4 Left rear window The closing of the door windows can be im-
5 Rear window override switch mediately halted by releasing the switch or,
( page 74). if switch was pressed past the resistance
point and released, by pressing the respec-
tive switch.

146
Controls in detail
Power windows

Opening the windows Fully opening the windows If the window still does not close when
(Express-open) there is no obstruction, then hold the
Press switch 1 to 4 at the
symbol k to the resistance point. Press switch 1 to 4 at the switch j down. The side window
symbol k past the resistance point will then close without the obstruction
The corresponding window will move sensor function.
and release.
downwards until you release the
switch. The corresponding window opens com-
pletely. Warning! G
Closing the windows
Press switch 1 to 4 at the Fully closing the windows Drivers door only:
symbol j to the resistance point. (Express-close) If within five seconds switch j is again
Press switch 1 to 4 at symbol j pressed past the resistance point and
The corresponding window will move released, the automatic reversal will not
past the resistance point and release.
upwards until you release the switch. operate.
The corresponding window closes com-
Warning G pletely.
Stopping windows
! Press respective switch again.
If you press and hold the switch when clos-
If the upward movement of the window
ing the window, and upward movement of
is blocked during the closing proce-
the window is blocked by some obstruction
dure, the window will stop and open
including but not limited to arms, hands, fin-
slightly.
gers, etc., the automatic reversal will not op-
erate. Remove the obstruction, press the
switch j again past the resistance
point and release.

147
Controls in detail
Power windows

Synchronizing power windows Rear quarter windows*


Warning! G
The power window must be resynchro- The switches are on the upper part of the
nized each time center console. When closing the windows, make sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
after the battery has been
by the closing procedure. The closing of the
disconnected.
windows can be immediately halted by
if the power windows cannot be fully releasing the switch.
opened (Express-open) or closed (Ex- When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
press-close). key from the steering lock, and lock the ve-
hicle. Do not leave children unattended in
Synchronizing the power windows the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
Switch on ignition. vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
ment may cause an accident and/or seri-
Press the power window switches at
1 Left side ous personal injury.
the symbol j until the side win-
2 Right side
dows are closed.
Switch on ignition ( page 33). Opening the windows
Hold the switches for approximately
one second. Press and hold the upper part of
switches 1 or 2.
The power window are synchronized.
The corresponding window will move
downwards until you release the
switch.

148
Controls in detail
Power windows

Closing the windows


Press and hold the lower part of
switches 1 or 2.
The corresponding window will move
upwards until you release the switch.

149
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*

Opening and closing the power With the sunroof closed or tilted open, a
tilt/sliding sunroof screen can be slid into the roof opening to Warning! G
guard against sun rays. When sliding the
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened and sunroof open, the screen will also retract. When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make
closed electrically. The switch for the sure that there is no danger of anyone being
tilt/sliding sunroof is on the overhead harmed by the closing procedure.
control panel. The opening procedure of the tilt/sliding
sunroof can be immediately halted by re-
leasing the switch or, if the switch was
moved past the resistance point and re-
leased, by moving the switch in any direc-
tion.
The closing procedure of the tilt/sliding
sunroof can be immediately halted by re-
leasing the switch.
The closing procedure of the tilt/sliding
Sunroof switch sunroof can be immediately reversed by
moving the switch in direction 1 or 2.
1 Push up to raise sunroof at rear
2 Push back to slide sunroof open The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
3 Push down to lower sunroof at rear In the event of an accident, the glass may
4 Push forward to slide sunroof closed shatter. This may result in an opening in the
roof.

150
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*

! Opening and closing the power


In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
To avoid damaging the seals, do not tilt/sliding sunroof
their seat belts or not wearing them properly
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an transport any objects with sharp edges To open, close, raise, or lower the
opening also presents a potential for injury which can stick out of the tilt/sliding tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof
for occupants wearing their seat belts prop- sunroof. switch to resistance point in the re-
erly as entire body parts or portions of them Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if quired direction of arrows 1 to 4.
may protrude from the passenger compart- there is snow or ice on the roof, as this Release the sunroof switch when the
ment. could result in malfunctions. tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened desired position.
key from steering lock and lock your vehicle. or closed manually should an electrical
Do not leave children unattended in the ve- i
malfunction occur ( page 271).
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. If the movement of the tilt/sliding sun-
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can roof is blocked during the closing pro-
Switch on ignition ( page 33).
cause an accident and/or serious personal cedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will
injury. stop and reopen slightly.

151
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*

Fully opening (Express-open) the power Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding Remove the respective fuse from the
tilt/sliding sunroof sunroof fuse box ( page 297).
To open the tilt/sliding sunroof, move Reinsert the fuse in the fuse box.
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be
the sunroof switch past the resistance
synchronized Switch on ignition.
point in the direction of arrow 2 and
release. after the battery has been Move and hold the sunroof switch in
disconnected or discharged the direction of arrow 1 or 4 until
The tilt/sliding sunroof almost opens the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at
completely. after the tilt/sliding sunroof has been
the rear or completely closed.
closed manually ( page 271)
Move the sunroof switch again briefly
Keep holding the sunroof switch in the
in the direction of arrow 2. after a malfunction
direction of arrow 1 or 4 for approx-
The tilt/sliding sunroof almost opens the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open imately one second.
completely. smoothly
The tilt/sliding sunroof is synchro-
nized.
Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof
during Express-open
Move the sunroof switch in any direc-
tion.
The movement of the tilt/sliding sun-
roof stops.

152
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are de- Cruise control
scribed on the following pages: Warning! G
Cruise control automatically maintains the
Cruise control, with which the vehicle
speed you set for your vehicle. Cruise control is a convenience system de-
can maintain a preset speed. signed to assist the driver during vehicle op-
Use of cruise control is recommended for
Parktronic*, with which you can assist eration. The driver is and must remain at all
driving at a constant speed for extended
your parking maneuvers. times responsible for the vehicle speed and
periods of time. You can set or resume
for safe brake operation.
The driving systems BAS, ABS, ESP, EBB cruise control at any speed over 20 mph
and 4-ETS, are described in the Safety (30 km/h). Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
and Security section ( page 76). and weather conditions make it advisable to
The cruise control function is operated by travel at a steady speed.
means of the cruise control lever.
The use of cruise control can be danger-
The cruise control lever is the uppermost ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
lever found on the left-hand side of the because conditions do not allow safe
steering column ( page 23). driving at a steady speed.
The use of cruise control can be danger-
ous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The Resume function should only be oper-
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
ously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.

153
Controls in detail
Driving systems

i !
On uphill or downhill grades, cruise Moving gear selector lever to
control may not be able to maintain the position N while driving also cancels
set speed. Once the grade eases, the cruise control. However, the gear se-
set speed will be resumed. lector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast
Canceling cruise control when the vehicle is in danger of skid-
ding (e.g. on icy roads).
There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
1 Set current or higher speed
i
Step on the brake pedal.
2 Set current or lower speed The last stored speed is canceled when
3 Cancel cruise control or you turn off the engine.
4 Resume at last set speed Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 3.
Setting current speed
Cruise control will be canceled. The
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired last speed set will be stored for later
speed. use.
Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
control lever.
The current speed is set.
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated.

154
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Setting a higher speed i Setting to last stored speed (Resume


When you use the cruise control lever function)
Lift the cruise control lever to
position 1 and hold it up until the de- to decelerate, the transmission will au-
sired speed is reached. tomatically downshift if the engines Warning! G
braking power does not brake the vehi-
Release the cruise control lever.
cle sufficiently. The speed stored in memory should only be
The new speed is set. set again if prevailing road conditions per-
Fine adjustment in 1 mph mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
i (Canada: 1 km/h) increments differences arising from returning to preset
Depressing the accelerator pedal does speed could cause an accident and/or seri-
not deactivate the cruise control. After Faster ous injury to you and others.
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing),
cruise control will resume the last Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 1. Briefly push the cruise control lever to
speed set.
position 4.
Slower The cruise control will resume the last
Setting a lower speed
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the set speed.
Depress the cruise control lever to
position 2 and hold it down until the direction of arrow 2. Remove your foot from the accelerator
desired speed is reached. pedal.

Release the cruise control lever. Transmission in LOW RANGE mode


The new speed is set.
i
The cruise control should not be used
during off-road driving.

155
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Parktronic* system (Parking assist) The Parktronic system monitors the sur-
Warning! G roundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
Warning! G Make sure that no persons or animals are in rear bumper.
the area in which you are maneuvering. You
The Parktronic is a supplemental system. It could otherwise injure them.
is not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility The Parktronic system is an electronic and
during parking and other critical maneuvers designed to assist the driver during park-
always rests with the driver. ing maneuvers. It visually and audibly indi-
Special attention must be paid to objects cates the relative distance between the
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes vehicle and an obstacle.
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road The Parktronic system is automatically
curbs). Such objects may not be detected by activated when you switch on the ignition.
the system and can damage the vehicle. The Parktronic system deactivates at 1 Sensors located in front bumper
The operational function of the Parktronic speeds over approximately 10 mph
system can be affected by dirty sensors, es- (15 km/h). At lower speeds the Parktronic
pecially at times of snow and ice. See system turns on again.
Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors
( page 243).
Interference caused by other ultrasonic sig-
nals (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash,
or the air brakes of trucks) can cause the
system to send erratic indications, and
should be taken into consideration.

156
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Range of the sensors Front sensors Minimum distance


To function properly, the sensors must be
Center approx. 39.4 in (100 cm) Center approx. 8 in (20 cm)
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the
sensors regularly, being careful not to Corners approx. 23.6 in (60 cm) Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm)
scratch or damaging the sensors.
Rear sensors When an obstacle is located in this area, all
warning displays will light up and a warning
Center approx. 47.2 in (120 cm) tone will sound. If the vehicle moves closer
Corners approx. 31.5 in (80 cm) than the minimum distance to an object,
the distance may no longer be displayed.
!
During parking maneuvers, pay special
attention to objects located above or
below the height of the sensors (e.g.
planters or trailer hitches). The Park-
tronic system will not detect such ob-
jects at close range and damage to
your vehicle or the object may result.
Ultrasonic signals from outside sourc-
es (e.g. truck air brakes or jackham-
mers) may impair the operation of the
Parktronic system.

157
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Warning indicators The gear selector lever position deter- !


mines which warning indicator is activat- If all red segments light up in the warn-
The warning indicators show the distance
ed. ing indicators, a dirty sensor or a ultra-
between the sensor and the obstacle. The
warning indicators for the front area are lo- sonic signal could be the reason.
Selector lever Warning indicator
cated above the center air vents in the Clean the sensors ( page 243).
position
dashboard. The warning indicator for the
rear area is located in the rear passenger D, R, N, P Front area activated After cleaning the sensors, switch
compartment lamp. the ignition on.
R Rear area activated

As soon as the sensors detect an obstacle,


one or more segments light up, depending
on the distance. An intermittent acoustic
warning will also sound as the seventh seg-
ment comes on and a constant acoustic
warning lasting a maximum of
three seconds will sound for the eighth
segment.

Front area warning indicator


1 Segments, left side of vehicle
2 Segments, right side of vehicle
Each warning indicator has six yellow and
two red segments.

158
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Switching Parktronic system on/off ! i


The Parktronic system can switched on or If the Parktronic system is malfunction- If you switch the ignition on, the Park-
off manually. ing, all red segments of the warning in- tronic system will be automatically
dicators light up and an additional switched on.
The Parktronic switch is located on the
warning sounds.
lower part of the center console. The rear Parktronic sensors will not au-
Contact your Mercedes-Benz Light tomatically disengage when towing a
Truck Center as soon as possible. trailer. Therefore switch the Parktronic
system off.
Switching off the Parktronic system
Press Parktronic switch on upper
part 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.

Switching on the Parktronic system


1 Parktronic off Press Parktronic switch on lower
2 Indicator lamp part 3.
3 Parktronic on
The indicator lamp 2 goes out.

159
Controls in detail
Loading

Loading instructions The handling characteristics of a fully load-


ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis-
tribution. It is therefore recommended to
Warning! G load the vehicle according to the illustra-
tions shown, with the heaviest items being
Always fasten items being carried as secure- placed towards the front of the vehicle.
ly as possible using cargo tie-down rings and
Please pay attention to and comply with
fastening materials appropriate for the
the following instructions when loading the
weight and size of the load.
vehicle and transporting cargo:
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown The gross vehicle weight which is the Always place items being carried
around inside the vehicle, and can cause in- weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, against front or rear seat backrests,
jury to vehicle occupants unless the items spare wheel, installed accessories, pas- and fasten them as securely as possi-
are securely fastened in the vehicle. sengers and luggage/cargo must never ble.
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The heaviest portion of the cargo
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
(GVWR) for your vehicle. In addition, the should always be kept as low as possi-
sion or sudden maneuver, always use parti-
load must be distributed in such a way so ble against front or rear seat backrests.
tion net when transporting cargo.
that the weight on each axle never exceeds
Never drive vehicle with the liftgate open. the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may the front and rear axle. The GVWR and
enter vehicle interior resulting in uncon- GAWR for your vehicle are indicated on the
sciousness and death. certification label which can be found on
the left door pillar.

160
Controls in detail
Loading

Cargo tie-down rings Carefully secure cargo by applying even


load on all rings with rope of sufficient
The cargo compartment is provided with
strength to hold down the cargo.
four tie-down rings. Additional two rings
are located at the rear of front seats. i
While the partition net* ( page 162)
will help protect you from smaller ob-
jects, it cannot prevent the movement
of large, heavier objects into the pas-
senger compartment in an accident.
For additional safety when transporting Such items must be properly secured
cargo while the rear seats are unoccupied, using the cargo tie-down rings in the
fasten the outer seat belts crosswise into cargo compartment floor.
the opposite side buckles.

i Cargo tie-down ring


The cargo compartment is the pre-
ferred place to carry objects. The en-
larged cargo compartment should only
be used for items which do not fit in the
cargo compartment alone.

161
Controls in detail
Loading

Hooks Partition net* Use of the partition net is a particularly im-


portant safety factor when the vehicle is
Four hooks located on the rear compart-
loaded higher than the top of the seat
ment trim panels, two on each side.
Warning! G backrests with smaller objects.
The partition net can be installed behind
Always lock backrest in its upright position
the backrests of the front or rear seats.
when rear seat bench is occupied by pas-
sengers, or cargo is being carried behind the
Engaging partition net
seat bench.
To help avoid personal injury from smaller
objects flying in the occupant compartment
during a collision or sudden maneuver, al-
ways use partition net when transporting
Hooks cargo.

Use the hooks to secure light weight items. The partition net cannot prevent the move-
The maximum permissible weight per hook ment of large, heavier objects into the pas-
is 9 lbs (4 kg). senger compartment in an accident. Such
items must be properly secured using the
cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compart- 1 Holder
ment floor ( page 161). 2 Mounting hook
Passenger use of seats behind installed par-
tition net is restricted because of the foot-
well being taken up by the net.

162
Controls in detail
Loading

One after the other, press the two Tightening partition net
mounting hooks 2 inward against the
spring pressure and turn them. i
Before tightening the partition net,
The mounting hooks are locked in this
remove the cargo floor plates
position and you can move the net into
( page 165).
position more easily.
Turn one of the mounting hooks 2 in
the opposite direction.
The spring pressure will push it out.
Installation behind the rear seats
Engage mounting hook 2 in
1 Tie-down hook
holder 1.
2 Ring
Turn the other mounting hook and en- 3 Tensioner
gage it in the opposite holder.
Insert tie-down hook 1 in rings 2.
Push both mounting hooks 2 forward
Pull on loose ends of tie-down straps
into holder 1.
Installation behind the front seats until net is tight.
1 Tie-down hook After driving a short distance, check
2 Ring the tension on the net and retighten if
necessary.

163
Controls in detail
Loading

Removing partition net Cargo compartment cover blind* Opening blind


Lift tensioner 3 upward to a horizon- Disengage blind and guide retraction
tal position to release tensioning of the by its handle 1.
strap.
Removing blind
Disengage tie-down hooks 1 from
rings 2.
Remove mounting hooks 2
( page 162) from holder 1
( page 162).
Roll up and close the partition net.
1 Handle
Store partition net behind rear seat
2 Holder
bench.

Warning! G 3 Button
Passenger use of third row seats with cargo
4 Mounting sleeve
compartment cover blind installed is re- Roll the blind up.
stricted.
Push mounting sleeve 4 inward
against spring pressure until it engag-
Closing blind es.
Pull blind on handle 1 across the car- Remove blind from mounts.
go compartment.
Guide blind into holders 2.

164
Controls in detail
Loading

Installing blind Cargo floor plates Storing cargo floor plates


Place left side of blind in left mount.
Position right side of blind over right Removing cargo floor plates
mount. i
Push button 3, releasing mounting Before you can remove the cargo floor
sleeve to slide into mount. plates, it is possible that the third row
seats* ( page 102) must be removed.

1 Hook and loop strip


Fold the left cargo floor plate together.
Open the hook and loop strip at the
bottom of backrest of the third row
seats* and insert cargo floor plate.
Close the hook and loop strip.

Lift cargo floor plate at rear edge


(arrow).
Cargo floor plate unhinges automati-
cally.
Remove cargo floor plate by pulling it
rearwards.

165
Controls in detail
Loading

Installing cargo floor plates Roof rack* !


Attach roof racks to the roof rails only.
Warning! G Use only those roof racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
Take into consideration that when the roof Follow manufacturers installation in-
rack is loaded, the handling characteristics structions.
are different from those when operating the The vehicle could otherwise be dam-
vehicles without the roof rack loaded. aged.
The maximum roof load when using roof
rack systems is 220 lb (100 kg). For further information, inquire at your
1 Opening Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
2 Pins
3 Attachment opening
4 Latch
Grip into opening 1 and guide pins 2
into attachment opening 3.
The center pin must snap into place in
latch 4.

Roof rails

166
Controls in detail
Useful features
Useful features
Storage compartments Glove box Storage compartment under front
passenger seat*
The storage compartment is lockable with
Warning! G its separate key.
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-
gage or cargo in the cargo compartment if
possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher
than the seat backs.
Always use partition net when transporting 1 Glove box lid release
cargo. Partition net cannot secure hard or 2 Glove box lid
heavy objects.
i
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy ob- 1 Lock cylinder
The opened glove box is illuminated
jects. 2 Handle
with the key in steering lock position 1
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help ( page 33).
to prevent stored objects from being thrown Locking and unlocking the storage com-
about and injuring vehicle occupants during partment
Opening the glove box
an accident. Turn the key clockwise.
Grab in recess and pull lid release 1.
The storage compartment is locked.
The glove box lid 2 opens downward.
Turn the key counterclockwise.
Closing the glove box The storage compartment is unlocked.
Push glove box lid up to close.

167
Controls in detail
Useful features

Opening the storage compartment Armrest storage compartments


Press the lock cylinder in and pull stor- A flat storage tray with a deeper storage
age compartment out using handle 2. compartment underneath is located below
the armrest. Both can be opened separate-
Closing the storage compartment ly.
Push the storage compartment in until
the lock engages.

4 Storage tray
5 Coin holder

Opening the storage tray


Press button 1 and lift up armrest.
1 Button to open storage tray The armrest contains two coin holders.
2 Button to open storage compartment
3 Open cover Opening the storage compartment
Press button 2 and lift up armrest.

168
Controls in detail
Useful features

Opening the storage compartment in Cup holders Cup holder in instrument panel
front of armrest
A cup holder is located on both the right
Slide the cover 3 rearward. and left side of the instrument panel.
Warning! G
The storage compartment below con-
tains a cup holder ( page 170). When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. Place only containers that fit into the
cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids on
open containers and do not fill containers to
a height where the contents, especially hot
liquids, could spill during vehicle maneu-
vers.

Opening the cup holder


Briefly touch top of cover.
The cup holder opens automatically.

Closing the cup holder


Fold the cup holder upwards and press
on it until it engages.

169
Controls in detail
Useful features

Cup holder in front of armrest Cup holder in rear center console Armrest in rear seat bench

Opening the cup holder Opening the cup holder Pull the armrest down by its top.
Slide cover rearward ( page 169). Briefly touch the cover.
Fold the cup holder forward. The cup holder opens automatically.

Closing the cup holder Closing the cup holder


Fold the cup holder backward. Press the cup holder forward and press
on it until it engages.
Slide cover forward.
!
Close the cup holder before folding the
rear seat bench.

170
Controls in detail
Useful features

Ashtrays and cigarette lighter Ashtray and cigarette lighter in the Removing ashtray insert
front center console

Warning! G Warning! G
Remove ashtray only with vehicle standing
Never touch the heating element or sides of
still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle
the cigarette lighter; they are extremely hot.
from movement. Move gear selector lever to
Hold the knob only.
position N. With gear selector lever in
When leaving the vehicle always remove the position N, turn off the engine.
key from the steering lock. Do not leave chil-
dren unattended in the vehicle, or with ac-
Secure vehicle from movement by set-
cess to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
ting the parking brake. Move the gear
use of vehicle equipment may cause an ac- 1 Ashtray
selector lever to position N.
cident and/or serious personal injury. 2 Cigarette lighter
3 Cover plate Now you have more room to take out
the insert.
i Opening the ashtray
The cigarette lighter socket can be Grip the insert on the sides and pull it
used to accommodate electrical acces- Briefly touch cover plate 3. out upwards.
sories up to a maximum of 50 W. The ashtray opens automatically.
Reinstalling ashtray insert
If the engine is off, the battery may be-
come discharged when used for long Install ashtray insert.
periods of time. Close the ashtray.

171
Controls in detail
Useful features

Cigarette lighter Reinstalling ashtray insert


Switch on the ignition. Install ashtray insert.
Push in cigarette lighter 2 Close the ashtray.
( page 171).
The cigarette lighter will pop out auto- Cigarette lighter
matically when hot. Switch on the ignition.
Push in cigarette lighter 2.
Ashtray and cigarette lighter in the rear
center console The cigarette lighter will pop out auto-
1 Ashtray matically when hot.
! 2 Cigarette lighter
Close the ashtray in the rear center 3 Cover plate
console before folding the rear seat
bench. Opening the ashtray
Briefly touch cover plate 3.
The ashtray opens automatically.

Removing ashtray insert


Grip the insert on the sides and pull it
out upwards.

172
Controls in detail
Useful features

Electrical outlet i Telephone*


The outlets function even if the key is
not in the ignition.
Warning! G
The electrical outlet can be used to
accommodate electrical consumers Never operate radio transmitters equipped
(e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
maximum of 180 W. out being connected to an external antenna)
If the engine is off, the battery may be- from inside the vehicle while the engine is
come discharged if used for long peri- running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
ods of time. tion of the vehicles electronic system, pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
Electrical outlet personal injury.
One outlet is located in the front passen-
ger footwell and another on the right-hand Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
side of the luggage compartment. phone or a citizens band unit, should only
Flip up cover and insert electrical plug be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
(cigarette lighter type). nected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
for information on the installation of an ap-
proved external antenna. Refer to the radio
transmitter operation instructions regard-
ing use of an external antenna.

173
Controls in detail
Useful features

You can take and place telephone calls Tele Aid*


Warning! G using the MCS unit.
See separate instruction manual for infor- !
Please do not forget that your primary re-
mation on how to operate the telephone. The initial activation of the Tele Aid sys-
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A drivers
tem may only be performed by:
attention to the road must always be
his /her primary focus when driving. For Warning! G completing the subscriber agree-
your safety and the safety of others, we rec- ment and
ommend that you pull over to a safe location Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
placing an acquaintance call using
and stop before placing or taking a tele- using a cellular telephone while driving a ve-
the button
phone call. hicle. Whether or not prohibited by law, for
safety reasons, the driver should not use the Failure to complete either of these
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
cellular telephone while the vehicle is in mo- steps will result in a system that is not
driving, please use the hands-free device
tion. activated. If the system is not activat-
and only use the telephone when road,
ed, the indicator lamp in the
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some Stop the vehicle in a safe location before an-
SOS button stays on after switching on
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a swering or placing a call.
ignition and the message TELE
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
AID NOT ACTIVATED will be shown in
Only operate the MCS (Modular Control Sys- the MCS display for approximately
tem)1 if road, weather and traffic conditions 10 seconds.
permit.
If you have any questions regarding ac-
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph tivation, please call the Response Cen-
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is ter at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
ly 14 m) every second.
1 Observe all legal requirements

174
Controls in detail
Useful features

The Tele Aid system i System self-check


(Telematic Alarm Identification on The SOS button, the Roadside Assis- Initially, after switching on ignation, mal-
Demand) tance button and the Information functions are detected and indicated (the
button are located in the over- indicator lamps in the SOS button, the
The Tele Aid system consists of three
head control panel. Roadside Assistance button and the
types of response:
Information button stay on longer
automatic and manual emergency Shortly after the completion of your ac- than 10 seconds or do not come on). The
roadside assistance and quaintance call, you will receive a user ID message TELE AID - VISIT WORKSHOP ap-
and password. By visiting pears for approx. 10 seconds in the MCS
information display.
www.mbusa.com and selecting Tele Aid
The Tele Aid system is operational provid- (USA only), you will have access to account
ing that the vehicles battery is charged, information, remote door unlock, profile
properly connected, not damaged and cel- and more.
lular and GPS coverage is available.
!
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
be adjusted using the volume control on
network for communication and the
the MCS unit.
GPS (Global Positioning System) satel-
To activate, press the SOS button, the lites for vehicle location. If either of
Roadside Assistance button or these signals are unavailable, the Tele
the Information button , depend- Aid system may not function and if this
ing on the type of response required. occurs, assistance must be summoned
by other means.

175
Controls in detail
Useful features

Emergency calls
Warning! G If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as ex- An emergency call is initiated
The Tele Aid control unit is located under pected. Have the system checked at the automatically:
nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
the front passenger seat. If there is accumu- following an accident in which the
lation of water or other liquid in this com- as soon as possible.
emergency tensioning detractors
partment, the Tele Aid control unit could (ETDs) or airbags deploy.
suffer an electrical short circuit making the
An emergency call can also be initiated
system inoperative. In this case the indica-
manually by opening the cover next to the
tor lamp in the SOS button will not illumi-
inside rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
nate during or will remain illuminated after
briefly pressing the button located under
the system self-check. Have the system
the cover. See ( page 178) for
checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz
instructions on initiating an emergency call
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
manually.
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button and/or in
the Information button do not come on dur-
ing the system self-check or if any of these
indicators remain illuminated constantly in
red and/or the message TELE AID -
VISIT WORKSHOP is displayed in the MCS
display after the system self-check, a mal-
function in the system has been detected.

176
Controls in detail
Useful features

Once the emergency call is in progress, the The Tele Aid system is available if:
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
it has been activated and is operation-
Warning! G
to flash. The message EMERGENCY CALL
al. Activation requires a subscription If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
CONNECTING CALL appears in the MCS dis-
for monitoring services, connection illuminated continuously and there was no
play. When the connection is established,
and cellular air time. voice connection to the Response Center
the message EMERGENCY CALL
CALL CONNECTED appears in the MCS dis- the relevant cellular phone network established, then the Tele Aid system could
play. All information relevant to the emer- and GPS signals are available and pass not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-
gency, such as the location of the vehicle the information on to the response cen- vant cellular phone network is not available).
(determined by the GPS satellite location ter. The message EMERGENCY CALL
system), vehicle model, identification num- CALL FAILED appears in the MCS display
ber and color are generated. i for approx. ten seconds.
Location of the vehicle on a map is only Should this occur, assistance must be sum-
A voice connection between the Response possible if the vehicle is able to receive
Center and the occupants of the vehicle moned by other means.
signals from the GPS satellite network
will be established automatically soon af- and pass the information on to the re-
ter the emergency call has been initiated. sponse center.
When a voice connection is established,
the audio system mutes and the message
TELE AID EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE
appears in the MCS display. The Response
Center will attempt to determine more pre-
cisely the nature of the accident provided
they can speak to an occupant of the vehi-
cle.

177
Controls in detail
Useful features

Initiating an emergency call manually Roadside Assistance button


Warning! G
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, ve-
hicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca-
tion. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
1 Cover vehicles approximate location if they re- 1 Cover
2 SOS button ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot 2 Roadside Assistance button
make voice contact with the vehicle occu-
Briefly press on cover 1. pants. Briefly press on cover 1.
The cover will open. The cover will open.
Press SOS button 2 briefly. Press and hold the button 2 (for long-
er than two seconds).
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside As-
concluded. sistance dispatcher will be initiated.
Wait for a voice connection to the Re- The button will flash while the call is in
sponse Center. progress. The message ROADSIDE
ASSISTANCE CONNECTING CALL will
Close cover 1 after the emergency appear in the MCS display.
call is concluded.

178
Controls in detail
Useful features

When the connection is established, the The Mercedes-Benz Roadside assistance i


message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified The indicator lamp in the Roadside As-
CALL CONNECTED appears in the MCS dis- Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to sistance button remains illumi-
play. The Tele Aid system will transmit data tow your vehicle to the nearest nated in red for approx. ten seconds
generating the vehicle identification num- Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. For during the system self-check after turn-
ber, model, color and location (subject to services such as labor and/or towing, ing the key in the steering lock to
availability of cellular and GPS signals). charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside position 2 (together with the SOS but-
Assistance manual for more information. ton and the Information button ).
i
The following is only available in the USA: See system self-check ( page 175)
While the call is connected you can
change to navigation menu by pressing Sign and Drive services: Services such when the indicator lamp does not light
NAVI button on the MCS unit. as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or up in red or stays on longer than ap-
the replacement of a flat tire with the proximately ten seconds.
A voice connection between the Roadside vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established. When a
voice connection is established the audio
system mutes and the message TELE AID
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL ACTIVE ap-
pears in the MCS display.
Describe the nature of the need for as-
sistance.

179
Controls in detail
Useful features

If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Information button When the connection is established, the
Assistance button is illuminated message INFO CALL CONNECTED appears
continuously and there was no voice in the MCS display. The Tele Aid system
connection to the Response Center es- will transmit data generating the vehicle
tablished, then the Tele Aid system identification number, model, color and lo-
could not initiate a Roadside Assis- cation (subject to availability of cellular
tance call (e.g. the relevant cellular and GPS signals).
phone network was not available). The
message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
i
CALL FAILED appears in the MCS dis- While the call is connected, you can
play. change to navigation menu by pressing
1 Cover NAVI button on the MCS unit.
Roadside Assistance calls can be ter-
2 Information button
minated using the END Button on the
A voice connection between the Customer
MCS unit. Briefly press on cover 1.
Assistance Center representative and the
The cover will open. occupants of the vehicle will be estab-
Press and hold the button (for longer lished. When a voice connection is estab-
than two seconds). lished the audio system mutes and the
message TELE AID INFO CALL ACTIVE
A call to the Customer Assistance Cen- appears in the MCS display. Information
ter will be initiated. The button will regarding the operation of your vehicle, the
flash while the call is in progress. The nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
message INFO CONNECTING CALL will or Mercedes-Benz USA products and ser-
appear in the MCS display. vices is available to you.

180
Controls in detail
Useful features

For more details concerning the Tele Aid The message INFO CALL FAILED ap- Upgrade signals
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and pears in the MCS display. The Tele Aid system processes calls using
use your ID and password (sent to you sep-
Information calls can be terminated us- the following priority.
arately) to learn more (USA only).
ing the END button on the MCS. Automatic emergency First priority
i Manual emergency Second priority
The indicator lamp in the Information !
button remains illuminated in red If the indicator lamps do not start flash- Roadside assistance Third priority
for approx. 10 seconds during the sys- ing after pressing one of the buttons or Information Fourth priority
tem self-check after turning key in the remains illuminated (in red) at any
time, the Tele Aid system has detected Should a higher priority call be initiated
steering lock to position 2 (together
a fault or the service is not currently ac- while you are connected, an upgrade (al-
with the SOS button and the Roadside
ternating) tone will be heard and the ap-
Assistance button ). tive, and may not initiate a call. Visit
your Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen- propriate indicator lamp will flash. If
See system self-check ( page 175) certain information such as vehicle identi-
ter and have the system checked or
when the indicator lamp does not light fication number or customer information is
contact the Response Center at
up in red or stays on longer than ap- not available, the operator may need to re-
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
proximately ten seconds. transmit.
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon
If the indicator lamp in the Information as possible. During this time you will hear a beep and
button is illuminated continuous- voice contact will be interrupted. Voice
ly and there was no voice connection to contact will resume once the retransmis-
the Response Center established, then sion is completed. Once a call is conclud-
the Tele Aid system could not initiate ed, a beep will be heard and the respective
an Information call (e.g. the relevant indicator lamp will stop flashing. The MCS
cellular phone network is not avail- system operation will resume.
able).

181
Controls in detail
Useful features

! i Remote door unlock


If the indicator lamp continues to flash When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, In case you have locked your vehicle unin-
or the system does not reset, contact the MCS system audio is muted and tentionally (e.g. key inside vehicle), and no
the Response Center at the selected mode (radio, tape or CD) other key is available:
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or pauses. The optional cellular phone (if
Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or installed) switches off. If you must use
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance this phone, the vehicle must be parked.
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes Disconnect the coiled cord and place
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Cus- the call. The navigation system (if en- You will be asked to provide your pass-
tomer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in gaged) will continue to run. A pop-up word which you provided when you
Canada. window will appear in the MCS display completed the subscriber agreement.
to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in Then return to your vehicle and pull
i progress. outside handle of the liftgate for mini-
The indicator lamp on the correspond- mum of 20 seconds until the SOS but-
ing button flashes until the call is con- ton is flashing.
cluded. Calls can only be terminated by The message EMERGENCY CALL
a Response Center or Customer Assis- CALL CONNECTED appears in the MCS
tance Center representative, except display.
Roadside Assistance and Information
calls, which can also be terminated by As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi-
using the END button on the MCS unit. cle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.

182
Controls in detail
Useful features

The Response Center will then unlock your Stolen Vehicle Recovery services Garage door opener
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
feature. The built-in remote control is capable of
Report the incident to the police. operating up to three separately controlled
i devices, for example garage door openers,
The police will issue a numbered
The remote door unlock feature is avail- incident report. gate openers, or other devices compatible
able if the relevant cellular phone net- with HomeLink or some other systems.
work is available. Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along You can program the signal transmitter
The SOS button will flash and the mes- with your password issued to you when buttons.
sage EMERGENCY CALL you subscribed to the service.
CALL CONNECTED will appear in the MCS
display to indicate receipt of the door The Response Center will then attempt
unlock command. to covertly contact the vehicles
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a located, the Response Center will
Response Center specialist will contact the local law enforcement and
attempt to establish voice contact with you. The vehicles location will only be
the vehicle occupants. provided to law enforcement.
If the outside liftgate handle was pulled
for more than 20 seconds before door i
unlock authorization was received by When the anti-theft alarm or the
the Response Center, you must wait tow-away alarm stays on for more than
15 minutes before pressing the outside 30 seconds, a call is initiated automat-
liftgate handle again. ically to the Response Center. See
anti-theft alarm system ( page 83)
and tow-away alarm ( page 84).

183
Controls in detail
Useful features

i
Warning! G Certain types of garage door openers
are incompatible with the integrated
Before programming the integrated remote
opener. If you should experience diffi-
control to a garage door opener or gate op-
culties with programming the transmit-
erator, make sure people and objects are
ter, contact an authorized
out of the way of the device to prevent po-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, or
tential harm or damage.When programming
call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
a garage door opener, the door moves up or
tance Center (in the USA only) at
down. When programming a gate operator,
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Remote control integrated into the the gate opens or closes.
overhead control panel Service (in Canada) at
Do not use the integrated remote control 1-800-387-0100.
1 Hand-held remote control trans- with any garage door opener that lacks safe-
mitter (not part of the vehicle ty stop and reverse features as required by
equipment) U.S. federal safety standards (this includes
2 Hand-held transmitter button any garage door opener model manufac-
tured before April 1, 1982). A garage door
3,4,5 Signal transmitter button
that cannot detect an object - signaling the
6 Indicator lamp door to stop and reverse - does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards.

184
Controls in detail
Useful features

i Programming or reprogramming the Step 3:


For operation in the USA only: integrated remote control
Hold the end of the hand-held remote
This device complies with Part 15 of Step 1: control transmitter 1 of the device
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to you wish to train approximately 2 to
Switch on ignition.
the following two conditions: 5 in (5 to12 cm) away from the surface
Step 2: of the integrated remote control locat-
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and If you have previously programmed an ed on the interior rear view mirror,
integrated signal transmitter button keeping the indicator lamp 6 in view.
(2) this device must accept any inter-
and wish to retain its programming, Step 4:
ference received, including interfer-
proceed to step 3. Otherwise, press
ence that may cause undesired Using both hands, simultaneously
and hold the two outer signal transmit-
operation. press the hand-held transmitter
ter buttons 3 and 5 and release
Any unauthorized modification to this button 2 and the desired integrated
them only when the indicator lamp 6
device could void the users authority signal transmitter button (3, 4
begins to flash after approximately
to operate the equipment. or 5). Do not release the buttons until
20 seconds (do not hold the button for
completing step 5.
longer than 30 seconds). This proce-
dure erases any previous settings for The indicator lamp 6 on the integrat-
all three channels and initializes the ed remote control will flash, first slowly
memory. If you later wish to program a and then rapidly.
second and/or third hand-held trans-
mitter to the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, do not repeat this
step and begin directly with step 3.

185
Controls in detail
Useful features

i i Rolling code programming


The indicator lamp 6 flashes the first If the indicator lamp 6 flashes rapidly To train a garage door opener (or other roll-
time the signal transmitter button is for about two seconds and then turns ing code devices) with the rolling code fea-
programmed. If this button has already to a constant light, continue with pro- ture, follow these instructions after
been programmed, the indicator lamp gramming steps 8 through 12 as your completing the Programming portion
will only start flashing after garage door opener may be equipped (steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
20 seconds. with the rolling code feature. person may make the following training
procedures quicker and easier.)
Step 5: Step 7: Step 8:
When the indicator lamp 6 flashes To program the remaining two buttons, Locate training button on the garage
rapidly, release both buttons. repeat the steps above starting with door opener motor head unit.
step 3.
Step 6: Exact location and color of the button
Press and hold the just-trained may vary by garage door opener brand.
integrated signal transmitter button Depending on manufacturer, the
and observe the indicator lamp 6. training button may also be referred
to as learn or smart button. If there
If the indicator lamp 6 stays on con-
is difficulty locating the transmitting
stantly, programming is complete and
button, refer to the garage door opener
your device should activate when the
operators manual.
integrated signal transmitter button is
pressed and released.

186
Controls in detail
Useful features

Step 9: Step 12: Gate operator/Canadian programming


Press training button on the garage Confirm the garage door operation by Canadian radio-frequency laws require
door opener motor head unit. pressing the programmed integrated transmitter signals to time-out (or quit)
signal transmitter button (3, 4 after several seconds of transmission
The training light is activated.
or 5). which may not be long enough for the inte-
You have 30 seconds to initiate the grated signal transmitter to pick up the sig-
following step. Step 13:
nal during programming. Similar to this
To program the remaining two buttons, Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
Step 10:
repeat the steps above starting with are designed to time-out in the same
Firmly press, hold for two seconds and step 3. manner.
release the programmed integrated
signal transmitter button (3, 4 If you live in Canada or if you are having dif-
or 5). ficulties programming a gate operator (re-
gardless of where you live) by using the
Step 11: programming procedures, replace step 4
Press, hold for two seconds and with the following:
release same button a second time to
complete the training process.
Some garage door openers (or other rolling
code equipped devices) may require you to
perform this procedure a third time to
complete the training.

187
Controls in detail
Useful features

Step 4: Erasing the remote control memory Reprogramming a single integrated


signal transmitter button
Continue to press and hold the inte- Switch on ignition.
grated signal transmitter button (3, To program a device using a signal trans-
Simultaneously hold down the signal
4 or 5) while you press and re-press mitter button previously trained, follow
transmitter buttons 3 and 5, for ap-
(cycle) your hand-held remote con- these steps:
proximately 20 seconds, or until the in-
trol transmitter 1 every two seconds
dicator lamp 6 flashes rapidly. Do not Press and hold the desired signal
until the frequency signal has been
hold for longer than 30 seconds. transmitter button (3, 4 or 5).
learned. Upon successful training, the
The codes of all three channels are Do not release the button.
indicator lamp 6 will flash slowly and
then rapidly after several seconds. erased. The indicator lamp will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing
Proceed with programming step 5 and i the integrated signal transmitter
step 6 to complete. If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes button, proceed with programming
of all three channels. starting with step 3.
Operation of remote control
Switch on ignition.
Select and press the appropriate inte-
grated signal transmitter button (3,
4 or 5 to activate the remote con-
trolled device.
The integrated remote control trans-
mitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed up to
20 seconds.

188
Controls in detail
Useful features

Trip computer* i Setting the date


With engine not running, the display Press MODE 2 repeatedly until the
The trip computer is located in the
switches off automatically 30 seconds date appears.
overhead console.
after the last entry.
Press RESET 1.
Selecting functions The month shown flashes.

Press MODE 2 repeatedly until the Press MODE 2 to advance to selected


desired display appears. month.

The functions are displayed in the Press RESET 1.


following order: The day shown flashes.
Date Press MODE 2 to advance to selected
Compass day.
1 RESET Press RESET 1.
Stop watch
2 MODE
3 Display Present fuel consumption The year shown flashes.

Average fuel consumption Press MODE 2 to advance to selected


Switching on the trip computer year.
Distance remaining
Switch on ignition. Press RESET 1.
Country
Display 3 shows one of the available The display stops flashing and the date
functions. Switching off trip computer is set.
If a function display does not appear,
press MODE 2.

189
Controls in detail
Useful features

Compass
The compass displays the direction the
vehicle is traveling. The display 3 will
show you N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W or NW.

i
The presence of buildings, bridges,
power lines and large antenna masts
can influence the displayed values. Me-
tallic or magnetic objects in or on the
vehicle can influence the accuracy of
the compass.

To make sure the display is correct, the


compass must be set to the proper geo- Zone map North America Zone map South America
graphic zone ( page 191). It may also be
necessary to calibrate the compass
( page 191).

190
Controls in detail
Useful features

Setting the compass zone Calibrating the compass Start and run the engine.
Determine the geographical point of If the vehicle was exposed to a significant Press MODE 2 ( page 189) repeat-
the vehicle with the aid of the zone magnetic zone, such as high voltage power edly until the compass display appears
maps. lines, the compass may have to be calibrat- in the trip computer display 3.
ed.
Switch on the ignition. Press RESET 1 and afterwards press
Press MODE 2 ( page 189) repeat- To calibrate the compass correctly, ob- MODE 2.
edly until the compass display appears serve the following: In the display appears CAL.
in the trip computer display 3. Calibrate the compass in an area free
Press and hold RESET 1 for approxi-
of steel superstructures and power
Press RESET 1 ( page 189) to select mately two seconds.
lines.
the compass zone mode.
The calibration mode is activated and
Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g.
The zone selected last is shown in the the display shows CAL.
exterior lamps, climate control, rear
display. Drive without interruption two full cir-
window defroster etc.).
Press RESET 1 repeatedly until the cles at a speed between 3 mph
Do not open or close the tilt/sliding
correct compass zone, as determined (5 km/h) and 7 mph (10 km/h).
from the zone map, is shown in the dis- sunroof.
The message CAL goes out after a short
play. Close doors and liftgate.
time. The calibration is now complete.
Press MODE 2 twice. i
The new compass zone is activated and An open liftgate triggers the
the compass display will be shown. display - - -.

191
Controls in detail
Useful features

i Stopping Distance remaining with fuel presently


If CAL remains in the display, calibration in tank
Press RESET 1 again to stop counting.
was not successfully completed. You Press MODE 2 ( page 189) repeat-
have to recalibrate: Resetting edly until the distance remaining dis-
Remove the key from the steering play appears in the trip computer
Press and hold RESET 1 until the dis-
lock. display 3.
play shows 0:00.
Start the vehicle and start the cali- i
bration procedure described previ- Average fuel consumption
When the fuel supply drops to reserve
ously. Press MODE 2 ( page 189) repeat- level the display flashes distance re-
We recommend that you have the com- edly until the average fuel consumption maining.
pass calibrated at a Mercedes-Benz display appears in the trip computer
USA only:
Light Truck Center. display 3.
The display alternates between
FUEL and distance remaining until
Stop watch supply is consistently below the re-
serve level. When the fuel supply is
Press MODE 2 ( page 189) repeat-
very low (approximately 1.5 gal
edly until the stop watch display ap-
[5.5 l]) FUEL is displayed
pears in the trip computer display 3.
continuously.
Counting
Press RESET 1 ( page 189) to start
counting.

192
Controls in detail
Useful features

Country
Press MODE 2 ( page 189) repeat- Setting CAN-English Setting CAN-French
edly until the country display appears
Press RESET 1 repeatedly until CAN is Press RESET 1 repeatedly until CAN is
in the trip computer display 3.
displayed. displayed.
Press and hold RESET 1 a minimum of Press MODE 2 to select ENG. Press MODE 2.
five seconds to change the country unit
system. Press MODE 2 again to set CAN-En- ENG is displayed.
glish.
Press RESET 1 to select Fr.
Canada units system selection
Press MODE 2 to set CAN-French.
You can choose between CAN-English or
CAN-French. The language selected determines how the
various displays are presented, see table.

Display Language Date Cardinal points Fuel consumption Distance remaining


GEr German DD.MM Sd, Nord, Ost, West l/100 km Kilometer
Gb English MM.DD South, North, East, West mi/gal (Imperial) Miles
ESP Spain DD.MM Sur, Norte, Este, Oeste l/100 km Kilometer
Fr French DD.MM Sud, Nord, Est, Ouest l/100 km Kilometer
USA American MM.DD South, North, East, West mi/gal (US) Miles
CAN-ENG American MM.DD South, North, East, West l/100 km Kilometer
CAN-Fr French DD.MM Sud, Nord, Est, Ouest l/100 km Kilometer

193
194
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care

195
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)

In the Operation section you will find The more cautiously you treat your vehicle After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may grad-
detailed information on operating, main- during the break-in period, the more satis- ually increase vehicle and engine speeds
taining and caring for your vehicle. fied you will be with its performance later to the permissible maximum.
on.
All of the above instructions, as may apply
Drive your vehicle during the first to your vehicle type, also apply when the
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but first 1000 miles (1500 km) after the en-
moderate vehicle and engine speeds. gine, the transfer case, the front differen-
tial or the rear differential has been
During this period, avoid heavy loads
replaced.
(full throttle driving) and excessive en-
gine speeds (no more than 2/3 of max- i
imum rpm in each gear).
Always obey applicable speed limits.
Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the gear selector lever.
Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).

196
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving instructions
Drive sensibly save fuel Drinking and driving Pedals

Fuel consumption, to a great extent, de-


pends on driving habits and operating con- Warning! G Warning! G
ditions.
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs Keep drivers foot area clear at all times. Ob-
To save fuel you should:
and driving are a very dangerous combina- jects stored in this area may impair pedal
Keep tires at the recommended infla- tion. Even a small amount of alcohol or movement.
tion pressures. drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
Remove unnecessary loads. and judgement. Power assistance
The possibility of a serious or even fatal ac-
Allow engine to warm up under low
cident are greatly increased when you drink
load use.
or take drugs and drive. Warning! G
Avoid frequent acceleration and decel-
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
eration. With the engine is not running, there is no
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
power assistance for the brake and steering
Have all maintenance work performed taking drugs.
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
at the intervals specified in the Mainte-
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
nance Booklet and as required by the
effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve-
maintenance service indicator. Contact
hicle.
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driv-
ing in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips and in hilly country.

197
Operation
Driving instructions

Brakes !
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the Be very careful not to endanger other
road users when you apply the brakes.
Warning! G brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating, Refer to the description of the Brake
After driving in heavy rain for some time thereby significantly reducing their effec- Assist System (BAS) ( page 78).
without applying the brakes or through wa- tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
ter deep enough to wet brake components, vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci- If the parking brake is released and the
the first braking action may be somewhat dent. brake warning lamp in the instrument clus-
reduced and increased pedal pressure may ter stays on and there is no audible warn-
be necessary to obtain expected braking ef- To help prevent brake disk corrosion after ing (EBP), the brake fluid level in the
fect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles driving on wet road surfaces (particularly reservoir is too low.
in front. salted roads), it is advisable to brake the Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
vehicle with considerable force prior to be the reason for low brake fluid in the res-
parking. The heat generated serves to dry ervoir.
the brakes.
Have the brake system inspected immedi-
If your brake system is normally only sub- ately. Contact an authorized
jected to moderate loads, you should occa- Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
sionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking All checks and service work on the brake
pressure at higher speeds. This will also system should be carried out by qualified
enhance the grip of the brake pads. technicians only. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

198
Operation
Driving instructions

Only install brake pads and brake fluid ! Driving off


recommended by Mercedes-Benz. When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
Warning! G by shifting into a lower gear to use the
when the road is clear of other traffic.
engines braking power. This helps
If other than recommended brake pads are prevent overheating of the brakes and Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
installed, or other than recommended brake reduces brake pad wear. place full load on the engine until the oper-
fluid is used, the braking properties of the ating temperature has been reached.
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that After hard braking, it is advisable to drive When starting off on a slippery surface, do
safe braking is substantially impaired. This on for some time, rather than immediately not allow a drive wheel to spin for an ex-
could result in an accident. parking, so the air stream will cool down tended period with the ESP switched off.
the brakes faster. Doing so may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

199
Operation
Driving instructions

Parking Tires
Warning! G
!
Set the parking brake whenever park-
To reduce the risk of personal injury, or Warning! G
damage to the vehicle powertrain, as a re-
ing or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
sult of vehicle/ trailer movement, always: If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
move gear selector lever to position P.
Keep right foot on brake pedal. ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-
When parking on hills, always turn front ble damage to your vehicle has occurred,
Shift gear selector lever to position N.
wheels towards the curb. you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
Have a second person place wheel ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
chocks on downhill side of left and right tion to an area which is a safe distance from
trailer wheels.
the road.
Slowly release brake pedal and let vehi-
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
cle and trailer roll into chocks until
stopped. for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or tire
Move gear selector lever to position P. dealer for repairs.
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel towards the road curb. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and be-
come visible at a tread depth of approxi-
mately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point
the tire is considered worn and should be
replaced.

200
Operation
Driving instructions

The treadwear indicator appears as a solid You should pay particular attention to the
band across the tread. Warning! G condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
Warning! G the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
point.

may lose control of the vehicle. Continued


Although the applicable federal motor vehi-
driving with a flat tire or driving at high Warning! G
cle safety laws consider a tire to be worn
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
when the treadwear indicators (TWI) be- If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
come visible at approximately 1/16 in will be substantially reduced. Under such
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not al- weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
low your tires to wear down to that level. As Hydroplaning with extreme caution.
tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the
adhesion properties on a wet road are
Depending on the depth of the water on
the road, hydroplaning may occur even at Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated
sharply reduced. radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth
low speeds and with new tires. Reduce ve-
Depending upon the weather and/or road hicle speed, avoid track grooves in the of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies road and apply brakes cautiously in the wheels for the winter season to make sure
widely. rain. normal balanced handling characteristics.
On packed snow, they can reduce your
Specified tire pressures must be main- Tire traction stopping distance as compared with sum-
tained. This applies particularly if the tires mer tires.
are subjected to high loads (e.g. high The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or Stopping distance, however, is still consid-
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temper- icy road is always lower than on a dry road. erably greater than when the road is not
atures). covered with snow or ice. Exercise appro-
priate caution.

201
Operation
Driving instructions

! ML 350 Winter driving instructions


Avoid spinning of one drive wheel. This Your vehicle is factory equipped with
may cause serious damage to the The most important rule for slippery or icy
H-rated tires, which have a speed rating
drivetrain which is not covered by the roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
of 130 mph (210 km/h).
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
An electronic speed limiter prevents your maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
vehicle from exceeding a speed of system under such conditions.
Tire speed rating 130 mph (210 km/h).
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local ML 500 move gear selector lever to position N. Try
speed limits should be obeyed. Use pru- Your vehicle is factory equipped with to keep the vehicle under control by cor-
dent driving speeds appropriate to prevail- V-rated tires, which have a speed rating rective steering action.
ing conditions. of 149 mph (240 km/h). i
An electronic speed limiter prevents your For information on driving with snow
Warning! G vehicle from exceeding a speed of chains, see Snow chains
130 mph (210 km/h). ( page 236).
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi- i
mum speed rating of the tires. For information on speed ratings for
Exceeding the maximum speed for which winter tires, see Winter tires
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail- ( page 235).
ure, causing loss of vehicle control and pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
injury and possible death, for you and for
others.

202
Operation
Driving instructions

If the vehicle is parked after being driven


Warning! G on salt-treated roads, the braking efficien- Warning! G
cy should be tested as soon as possible af-
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift ter driving is resumed. The outside temperature indicator is not de-
in order to obtain braking action. This could signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi- is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. In-
cle control. Your vehicles ABS will not pre- Warning! G dicated temperatures just above the freez-
vent this type of control loss. ing point do not guarantee that the road
Make sure not to endanger any other road
Do not engage the transfer case in position surface is free of ice.
users when carrying out these braking ma-
LOW when driving on ice or packed snow. At neuvers.
speeds below 18 mph (30 km / h) vehicle For more information, see Winter driving
steering is adversely affected by the LOW ( page 235).
RANGE - ABS ( page 77).
Warning! G
Road salts and chemicals can adversely af- If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
fect braking efficiency. Increased pedal sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust
force may become necessary to produce pipe and from around the vehicle with the
the normal brake effect. engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in-
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
terior resulting in unconsciousness and
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
death.
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking
efficiency back to normal. To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the ve-
hicle not facing the wind.

203
Operation
Driving instructions

Standing water Off-road driving


Warning! G
!
Do not drive through flooded areas or Warning! G Sand, dirt, mud and other material having
friction property can cause exceptional wear
water of unknown depth. Before driving
Drive slowly in unknown terrain. This will and tear as well as brake failure.
through water, determine its depth.
make it easier to recognize unexpected ob- Have the brakes checked for dirt build-up
Never accelerate before driving into
stacles and avoid damage to the vehicle. and cleaned. There is otherwise a risk that
water. The bow wave could force water
into the engine and auxiliary equip- To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, never full braking power may not be available in an
ment, thus damaging them. turn it around on steep inclines. If the vehi- emergency.
cle cannot complete the attempted climb,
If you must drive through standing wa- back it down in reverse gear.
ter, drive slowly to prevent water from Read this chapter carefully before you be-
entering the passenger compartment Do not drive along the side of a slope (dan- gin off-road travel.
or the engine compartment. Water in ger of vehicle rollover). The vehicle might Familiarize yourself with the vehicle char-
these areas could cause damage to otherwise rollover. If in doing so the vehicle acteristics and gear changing before you
electrical components or wiring of the begins to show a tendency to roll, immedi- attempt any difficult terrain off-road driv-
engine or transmission, or could result ately steer into a line of gravity (straight up ing. We recommend that you start out with
in water being ingested by the engine or downhill). easy off-road travel.
through the air intake, causing severe Never let the vehicle roll backwards in idle.
internal engine damage. Any such dam- You may lose control of the vehicle if you
age is not covered by the use only the service brake.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

204
Operation
Driving instructions

Special driving features for off-road ! In sandy soil, please drive at a


driving Observe the following during off-road steady speed as allowed by condi-
The following driving features are available driving: tions. This helps overcome the vehi-
for specific kind of operation: cle rolling resistance and reduces
Adjust vehicle speed to condition of
the likelihood of the vehicle sinking
LOW RANGE mode ( page 127) terrain. The more uneven, rutty and
into the ground.
steeper the terrain, the lower the
LOW RANGE ABS ( page 77)
speed should be. Do not initiate jumps with the vehi-
LOW RANGE 4-ETS ( page 80) cle. It interrupts the forward mo-
Watch out for obstacles, such as
mentum of the vehicle.
LOW RANGE ESP ( page 81) rocks, holes, tree stumps and ruts.
Always drive onto slopes with the
Be especially careful when driving
Off-road driving rules the engine running and the vehicle
in unknown territory. It may be nec-
in gear.
Engage the LOW RANGE mode before driv- essary to get out of the vehicle and
ing under off-road conditions scout the path you intend to take.
Checklist before off-road driving
( page 127).
Before driving through water, deter-
Fasten items being carried as securely as mine is depth. Engine oil level
possible ( page 160).
Do not stop vehicle while immersed Check the engine oil level
i in water, and do not shut off the ( page 224). The display OIL i.O
engine. must appear via display in the speed-
We recommend keeping doors, liftgate,
ometer.
windows, and tilt/sliding sunroof*
closed whenever driving in off-road Only then can the vehicle obtain a trou-
mode. ble-free oil supply, even on steep gradi-
ents.

205
Operation
Driving instructions

Tires Driving in steep terrain Do not drive along the side of a slope
(danger of vehicle rollover). If in doing
Check the tread depth and maintain
so the vehicle begins to show a tenden-
specified tire pressure (see tire pres-
cy to roll, immediately steer into a line
sure label inside the fuel filler flap).
of gravity (straight up or downhill).
Check tires for possible damage and
To help avoid the vehicle rolling over,
remove foreign objects.
never turn it around on steep inclines.
Replace missing valve caps. If the vehicle cannot complete the at-
tempted climb, back it down in reverse
Rims gear.
Dented or bent rims can cause tire Utilize the engines braking power
Slope angle
pressure loss and damage the tire when descending a slope, observe the
beads. For this reason, check and, if 1 25
engine speed (do not overrev the en-
necessary, change rims before driving 2 26
gine). Apply the service brake as need-
off-road. Switch to LOW RANGE mode before ed.
starting to drive up or down steep in-
Check the brakes after a lengthy down-
Vehicle tool kit clines ( page 127).
grade drive.
Check if the vehicle jack is functional. Driving on embankments, slopes and
other steep inclines should only be i
In all cases take the vehicle tool kit, a
strong tow rope, a shovel and a small done straight up or downhill, i.e. in the Avoid excessive engine speeds drive
plank (to put under the vehicle jack on line of gravity. Maximum vehicle climb- with moderate engine speeds
sandy soil) with you. ing ability is a 60% grade. (max. 3000 RPM).
Select gear range 2 or 1 on the auto-
matic transmission ( page 122).

206
Operation
Driving instructions

Traction in steep terrain Driving across a hilltop Driving downhill


Be easy on the accelerator and watch Decelerate just ahead of a hilltop (do Select gear range 1 on the automatic
for continuous wheel traction when not select gear range N), to prevent the transmission ( page 122).
driving in steep terrain. vehicle from speeding up too much af-
Drive downhill observing the same
ter climbing a hill.
The 4-ETS helps greatly when starting rules as driving uphill ( page 206).
out on a steep incline when the front Use the momentum of the vehicle to The special LOW RANGE ABS setting
wheels have then the tendency to slip drive across the hilltop. allows for precise and brief (cyclical)
due to the weight shifting away the Driving in this manner prevents the ve- blocking of the front wheels, permitting
front axle. hicle from jumping across the hilltop them to dig into loose ground.
The 4-ETS recognizes the situation and and thus loosing its forward momen-
Remember that the front wheels when
limits the torque for the front wheels by tum.
stopped, slide across a surface, thus
braking them. Simultaneously the
loose their ability to steer the vehicle.
torque for the rear wheels is increased.

207
Operation
Driving instructions

Driving through water Switch to LOW RANGE mode before Do not stop vehicle while immersed in
driving through water ( page 127). water, and do not shut off the engine.
Switch off the exterior lamps as well as There is a very high level of driving re-
the automatic climate control. sistance in water. The surface is slip-
pery and may not be firm, making
Select gear range 1 on the automatic
pulling away in water difficult and dan-
transmission ( page 122).
gerous.
Enter the water only at a shallow spot,
Clean mud off the tire tread after driv-
driving at walking speed.
ing through water.
! To dry the brakes, apply pressure to the
1 20 in (50 cm) Never accelerate before driving into brake pedal several times after leaving
Before driving through water, deter- the water. The bow wave could force the water.
mine its depth. water into the engine and auxiliary
equipment, thus damaging them.
It should not be deeper than approxi-
mately 20 inches (50 cm).
Make sure you check the water bed.
The ground surface may not be firm
which may result in deeper waters than
expected when driving the vehicle
through it.

208
Operation
Driving instructions

Crossing obstacles ! Check the vehicle clearance before


Obstacles can damage the vehicle crossing obstacles.
undercarriage or suspension compo- Select gear range 1 on the automatic
nents. If possible use the assistance of transmission ( page 122).
a second person outside the vehicle to
Cross obstacles (e.g. tree stumps or
scout the path you intend to take and
big rocks) very slowly by aiming one of
check for adequate ground clearance
the front wheels at the center of the ob-
when you cross obstacles with your ve-
stacle, and repeat same with the rear
hicle. The person assisting you outside
wheel.
the vehicle should always be a safe dis-
tance away from the vehicle and posi- !
tioned so that he or she cannot get hurt Special attention is needed when you
in case of any unexpected vehicle cross obstacles on a steep incline.
movement.
The vehicle could slide sideways as a
After off-road driving or crossing obsta-
result of its possible slanted position
cles, inspect vehicle for any damage,
which in turn may result in the vehicle
especially vehicle undercarriage and
tipping or rolling over.
suspension components. Failure to do
so can adversely affect the vehicle's fu-
ture performance, including increased
chance of an accident.

209
Operation
Driving instructions

Ruts Returning from off-road driving Off-road driving increases strain on the
vehicle.
A number of off-road tracks or other by-
ways have deep ruts which can cause the Warning! G We recommend that you inspect the vehi-
undercarriage to come in contact with the cle for possible damage after each off-road
ground. If you feel a sudden significant vibration or trip. Recognizing any damage and a subse-
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi- quent timely repair reduces the chance of
Select gear range 1 on the automatic
ble damage to your vehicle has occurred, a possible breakdown or accident later on.
transmission ( page 122).
you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
Drive next to the ruts rather than Proceed as follows:
ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
through them if at all possible. tion to an area which is a safe distance from Switch off the LOW RANGE mode
the roadway. ( page 127).
Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for Remove excessive dirt from tires,
possible damage. If the vehicle or tires ap- wheels, wheel housings, and under-
pear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest body.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or tire
For instance, after driving in mud, clean
dealer for repairs.
the radiator, chassis, engine, brakes,
and wheels from extreme dirt using a
strong jet of water.

210
Operation
Driving instructions

Inspect frame, oil pan, brake hoses, Trailer towing Trailer hitches
etc., as well as vehicle underbody for
Only install a trailer hitch receiver ap-
possible damage.
proved for your vehicle.
Check tires for possible damage, clean
Warning! G
For information on availability and in-
all exterior lamps, and conduct a brake
Failure to use proper equipment and driving stallation, see an authorized
test.
technique can result in a loss of vehicle con- Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Check for brush or branches caught in trol when towing a trailer.
The bumpers on your vehicle are not
the undercarriage. Improper towing or failure to follow the in- designed for use with clamp-type hitch-
They could increase the possibility of a structions contained in this guide can result es.
fire, as well as cut fuel and/or brake in serious injury. Follow the guidelines be-
Do not attach rental hitches or other
lines, puncture rubber bellows of the low carefully to assure safe trailer operation.
bumper-type hitches to them.
axles or drive shafts. Ask an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
To reduce the possibility of damage, re-
After continued operation in mud, Truck Center should you require an explana-
tion of information contained in this guide.
move the hitch ball adaptor from the
sand, water or other dirty conditions
receiver when not in use.
clean the brake discs, wheels, brake
pads and check and clean axle joints.

211
Operation
Driving instructions

Electrical connections Vehicle and trailer weights and ratings Loading a trailer
The vehicle is prewired to accept the sev- Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the When loading a trailer, you should ob-
en-wire harness included in the maximum permissible vehicle weight: serve that neither the permissible GTW,
Mercedes-Benz approved trailer hitch re- 6614 lbs (3000 kg). nor the GVWR are exceeded.
ceiver kit.
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW): Maximum permissible values are listed
An additional four-pole conversion plug is Comprises weight of vehicle including fuel, on the safety compliance certification
included in the Mercedes-Benz supplied tools, spare wheel, installed accessories, labels for the vehicle and for the trailer
trailer hitch receiver kit. passengers, cargo and trailer tongue. It to be towed.
For further information, see an authorized must never exceed the GVWR. The lowest value listed must be select-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the ed when determining how the vehicle
maximum permissible axle weight: and trailer are loaded.
The tongue weight at the hitch ball
front 2976 lbs (1350 kg) must be added to the GVW to prevent
rear 3858 lbs (1750 kg) exceeding your Mercedes-Benz tow
vehicles rear GAWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the maxi-
mum permissible trailer weight to be i
towed: We recommend loading the trailer in
5000 lbs (2260 kg). such a manner that it has a tongue
weight (TW) between 10% and 15% of
Trailer Tongue Weight Rating (TWR) is the
the GTW.
maximum permissible weight on the trailer
tongue:
500 lbs (225 kg) limit for Mercedes-Benz
approved hitch receiver.

212
Operation
Driving instructions

Checking weights of vehicle and trailer Attaching a trailer !


To assure that the tow vehicle and trail- Observe maximum permitted trailer Do not connect a trailer brake system
er are in compliance with the maximum dimensions (width and length). (if trailer is so equipped) directly to the
permissible weight limits have the load- vehicles hydraulic brake system, as
Most states and all Canadian provinces
ed rig (tow vehicle including driver, pas- your vehicle is equipped with antilock
require
sengers and cargo, trailer fully loaded) brakes. If you do, neither the vehicles
weighed on a commercial scale. safety chains between your tow vehicle brakes nor the trailers brakes will func-
and the trailer. tion properly.
Check the vehicles front and rear
Gross Axle Weight (GAW), the GTW and The chains should be crisscrossed un-
TW. der the trailer tongue. They must be at- i
tached to the hitch receiver, and not to The provided vehicle electrical wiring
The values as measured must not be
the vehicles bumper or axle. harness for trailer towing has a brake
exceeded, according to the weight list-
Make sure to leave enough slack in the signal wire (color orange) for hook-up
ed under Vehicle and trailer weight
chains to permit turning corners. to a brake controller.
and ratings.
a separate brake system at various You should consider using a trailer
trailer weights. sway control system. For further infor-
mation see an authorized
a break-away switch on trailers with a Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
separate brake system.
The switch activates the trailer brakes
in the possible event that the trailer
might separate from the tow vehicle.

213
Operation
Driving instructions

Towing a trailer Adjust the mirrors to permit unobstructed The vehicle and trailer combination is
view beyond rear of trailer. heavier, and therefore is limited in ac-
There are many different laws, including
celeration and climbing ability, and re-
speed limit restrictions, having to do with If the trailer has electric brakes, start
quires longer stopping distances.
trailer towing. Make sure your rig will be le- your vehicle and trailer moving slowly,
gal, not only for where you reside, but also and then apply only the trailer brake It is more prone to reacting to side wind
for where you will be driving. A good controller by hand to make sure the gusts, and requires more sensitive
source for this information can be the po- brakes are working properly. steering input.
lice or local authorities.
Always secure items in the trailer to If possible, do not brake abruptly, but
Note the following points, when driving prevent load shifts while driving. rather engage the brake slightly at first
with the trailer: When towing a trailer, check occasion- to permit the trailer to activate its
In order to gain skill and an under- ally to make sure the load is secure, brake. Then increase the braking force.
standing of the vehicles behavior, you and that lighting and trailer brakes (if !
should practice turning, stopping and so equipped) are functioning properly.
If the trailer should begin to sway, re-
backing up in an area which is free from
Take into consideration that when tow- duce the vehicles speed and use the
traffic.
ing a trailer, the handling characteris- brake controller by hand to straighten
Before you start driving check the tics are different and less stable from out the vehicle and trailer.
those when operating the vehicle with-
trailer hitch In no case should you attempt to
out a trailer.
break-away switch straighten out the tow vehicle and trail-
It is important to avoid sudden maneu- er by increasing the speed or over-
safety chains vers. steering and stepping on the brakes.
electrical connections
lighting and tires

214
Operation
Driving instructions

If the transmission hunts between If the engine coolant rises to an ex- Passenger compartment
gears on inclines, manually shift to a tremely high temperature (coolant tem-
lower gear (select 4, 3, 2 or 1). perature needle approaching the red
A lower gear and reduction of speed re-
zone) when the air conditioning is on, Warning! G
turn off the air conditioning system.
duces the chance of engine overload-
Always fasten items being carried as secure-
ing and/or overheating. Engine coolant heat can be additionally
ly as possible.
vented by opening the windows,
On very steep inclines, not manageable In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
switching the climate control fan speed
with gear selector lever in position 1, den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
to high and setting the temperature
switch transfer case to LOW RANGE around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
control to the maximum hot position.
mode ( page 127). to vehicle occupants unless the items are
Extreme care must be exercised since
When going down a long hill, shift into securely fastened in the vehicle.
a lower gear and use the engines brak- your vehicle with a trailer will require
additional passing distance ahead than The rear cargo compartment is the preferred
ing effect. place to carry objects. Always use the parti-
when driving without a trailer.
Avoid riding the brakes, thus overheat- tion net when transporting cargo. Partition
Because your vehicle and trailer is net cannot secure hard or heavy objects. Al-
ing the vehicle and trailer brakes.
longer than your vehicle alone, you will ways fasten items being carried as securely
also need to go much farther ahead of as possible using the cargo tie-down rings in
the passed vehicle before you can re- the cargo floor area and fastening materials.
turn to your lane.

215
Operation
Driving instructions

Driving abroad Control and operation of radio trans- Telephones and two-way radios
mitters
Abroad, there is an extensive
Mercedes-Benz service network at your Warning! G
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas MCS, radio and telephone*
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
which are not listed in the index of your
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center directo- Warning! G out being connected to an external antenna)
ry, you should request pertinent informa-
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
tion from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Do not forget that your primary responsibili-
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
Light Truck Center. ty is to drive the vehicle. Only operate the
tion of the vehicles electronic system, pos-
MCS, radio or telephone1 if road, weather
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
and traffic conditions permit.
personal injury.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
phone or a citizens band unit should only
ly 14 m) every second.
be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
1 Observe all legal requirements. nected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation in-
structions regarding use of an external an-
tenna.

216
Operation
Driving instructions

Catalytic converter Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements.


Warning! G For details refer to the Maintenance Book-
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with let.
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op-
important element in conjunction with the erate this vehicle in areas where combusti-
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con- ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves Warning! G
trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis- can come into contact with the hot exhaust
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
sions. Keep your vehicle in proper system, as these materials could be ignited
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
operating condition by following our rec- and cause a vehicle fire.
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-
ommended maintenance instructions as
sciousness and lead to death.
outlined in your Maintenance Booklet. Emission control
Do not run the engine in confined areas
! Certain engine systems serve to keep the (such as a garage) which are not properly
To prevent damage to the catalytic con- toxic components of the exhaust gases ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
verters, use only premium unleaded within permissible legal limits. fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
gasoline in this vehicle. have the cause determined and corrected
These systems, of course, will function immediately. If you must drive under these
Any noticeable irregularities in engine properly only when maintained strictly ac- conditions, drive only with at least one win-
operation should be repaired promptly. cording to factory specifications. Any ad- dow fully open at all times.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel justments on the engine should, therefore,
may reach the catalytic converter, be carried out only by qualified
causing it to overheat and start a fire. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center autho-
rized technicians. Engine adjustments
should not be altered in any way. More-
over, the specified service jobs must be
carried out regularly according to

217
Operation
Driving instructions

Coolant temperature
Warning! G
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem- Driving when your engine is badly over-
perature may rise to approx. 248F heated can cause some fluids which
(120C). may have leaked into the engine com-
partment to catch fire. You could be se-
The engine should not be operated with riously burned.
the coolant temperature in the red zone. Steam from an overheated engine can
Doing so may cause serious engine dam- cause serious burns and can occur just
age which is not covered by the by opening the engine hood. Stay away
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.

218
Operation
At the gas station
At the gas station
Refueling !
The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel
filler neck. Do not drop the cap. It could
Warning! G damage the vehicle paint finish.
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
It burns violently and can cause serious inju-
ry. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
unit cuts out do not top up or overfill.
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish !
all smoking materials. Never allow sparks,
To prevent damaging the lens of the
flame or smoking materials near gasoline! 1 Fuel filler flap plastic tail lamp, make certain that no
2 Fuel cap gasoline comes into contact with it.
The fuel filler flap is located on the Remove the key from the steering lock.
left-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with Open the fuel filler flap 1 by pulling in
direction of the arrow.
Warning! G
the remote control automatically
locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap. Turn the fuel cap 2 to the left and hold Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres-
on to it until possible pressure is re- sure in the system which could cause a gas
leased. discharge. This could cause the gas to spray
back out when removing the fuel pump noz-
Take off the cap.
zle, which could cause personal injury.

219
Operation
At the gas station

Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the i


right. Leaving the engine running and the fuel
You will hear when the fuel cap is tight- cap open can cause the yellow fuel
ened. tank reserve warning lamp to flash and
the ? malfunction indicator lamp
Close the fuel filler flap.
(USA only) or the malfunction in-
i dicator lamp (Canada only) to illumi-
Only use premium unleaded gasoline nate.
with a minimum Posted Octane Rating For more information, see Practical
of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON). hints ( page 254).
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump.
For more information on gasoline, see
the Factory Approved Service Products
pamphlet.

220
Operation
At the gas station

Check regularly and before a long trip Coolant Windshield/rear window washer
system and headlamp cleaning
For normal replenishing, use water (pota-
Open the hood ( page 222). system*
ble water quality). For more information,
see Coolant level ( page 227) and see For more information on refilling the reser-
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. voir, see Windshield/rear window washer
( page 312). system and headlamp cleaning system*
( page 230).
Brake fluid
Vehicle lighting
!
Check function and cleanliness. For infor-
If you find that the brake fluid in the
mation on replacing light bulbs, see Re-
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
placing bulbs ( page 274).
minimum mark or below, have the
1 Engine oil level brake system checked for brake pad For more information, see Combination
2 Coolant level thickness and leaks immediately. Noti- switch ( page 107).
3 Brake fluid fy an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
4 Windshield washer system and Truck Center immediately. Do not add Tire inflation pressure
headlamp cleaning system* brake fluid as this will not solve the For more information, see Checking tire
problem. For more information, see inflation pressure ( page 232).
Engine oil level Practical Hints ( page 251).
For more information on engine oil, see
Engine oil ( page 223).

221
Operation
Engine compartment

Hood Pull release lever 1 downwards. Pull up on the hood and then release it.
The hood is unlocked. Handle 2 pro- The hood will be automatically held
trudes slightly from the radiator-grille. open at shoulder height by gas-filled
Warning! G If not, lift the hood slightly. struts.
Do not pull the release lever while the vehi- !
cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
To avoid damage to the windshield wip- Warning! G
be forced open by passing air flow.
ers or hood, never open the hood if the
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
wiper arms are folded forward away
Opening moving parts when the hood is open and the
from the windshield.
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for ap-
proximately 30 seconds or even restart af-
ter the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.

1 Release lever
2 Handle for opening the hood
Pull handle 2 to its stop out of the
radiator-grille.

222
Operation
Engine compartment

Closing Engine oil


Warning! G
The amount of oil your engine needs will
If you see flames or smoke coming from the Warning! G depend on a number of factors, including
engine compartment, or if the coolant tem- driving style. Higher oil consumption can
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
perature gauge indicates that the engine is occur when
anyone.
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
the vehicle is new
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary, Let the hood drop from a height of the vehicle is driven frequently at
call the fire department. approximately 1 ft (30 cm). higher engine speeds
The hood will lock audibly. Engine oil consumption checks should only

be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Warning! G Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed. i
The engine is equipped with a transistorized If you can raise the hood at a point Do not use any special lubricant addi-
ignition system. Because of the high voltage above the headlamps, then it is not tives, as these may damage the drive
it is dangerous to touch any components (ig- properly closed. Open it again and let it assemblies. Using special additives not
nition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic drop with somewhat greater force. approved by Mercedes-Benz will
socket) of the ignition system restrict your warranty entitlement.
! More information on this subject is
with the engine running
Do not push the hood closed manually, available at any Mercedes-Benz Light
while starting the engine as this could damage it. Truck Center.
if ignition is on and the engine is
turned manually

223
Operation
Engine compartment

Checking engine oil level via display Wait until the display ------ appears in Other display messages
the speedometer display 2.
When checking the oil level the vehicle If there is excess engine oil with the engine
must Within one second press button 1 at normal operating temperature, the
twice. following message will appear in the
be parked on level ground
display:
be at normal operating temperature One of the following messages will
subsequently appear in the display: OIL HI
have been stationary for at least five
OIL i.O The oil level is too high.
minutes with the engine turned off
The oil level is correct. Engine oil Have excess oil siphoned.
To check the engine oil level via the display
does not to be added.
in the speedometer, do the following: !
1.0 L
Turn the key in the steering lock to Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
position 2. Add 1.0 liter of engine oil. off. It could cause damage to the
1.5 L engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Add 1.5 liters of engine oil. Warranty.
2.0 L
Add 2.0 liters of engine oil.
For adding engine oil see ( page 314).
For more information on engine oil, see the
Technical data section ( page 312) and
( page 314).
1 Button
2 Display in speedometer

224
Operation
Engine compartment

The display ------ flashes in the Checking engine oil level with the oil Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.
speedometer display, if a proper oil level dipstick
Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the
check cannot be performed.
When checking the oil level the vehicle dipstick guide tube.
If engine is at normal operating must
Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after
temperature, wait five minutes before
be parked on level ground approximately three seconds to obtain
repeating check procedure.
be at normal operating temperature accurate reading.
If engine is not yet at normal operating
temperature, wait 30 minutes before have been stationary for at least five
repeating check procedure. minutes with the engine turned off

i i
Perform the engine oil level check with The engine oil level can be checked by
the dipstick if it cannot be completed either the oil dipstick or via the
via the speedometer display speedometer display in the instrument
( page 225). cluster ( page 224). The amount of
engine oil needed is shown more
In this case we recommend that you
precisely in the speedometer display. Oil dipstick
have the system checked at a
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. The oil level is correct when it is between
To check the engine oil level with the oil the lower (min) and upper (max) mark of
dipstick, do the following: the oil dipstick.
See the Practical hints section
( page 260) if the low engine oil level Open the hood ( page 222).
warning lamp in the instrument cluster Pull out oil dipstick 1 ( page 226).
flashes.

225
Operation
Engine compartment

i Adding engine oil


The filling quantity between the upper Only use approved engine oils and oil fil-
and lower marks on the oil dipstick is ters required for vehicles with Mainte-
approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l). nance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS
(Canada vehicles). For a listing of approved
If necessary, add engine oil. engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Fac-
tory Approved Service Products pamphlet
For adding engine oil see ( page 226).
in your vehicle literature portfolio, or con-
For more information on engine oil, see tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Technical data section ( page 312) and Truck Center.
( page 314). 1 Oil dipstick
Using engine oils and oil filters of specifica- 2 Filler cap
See the Practical hints section tion other than those expressly required
Unscrew filler cap 2 from filler neck.
( page 260) if the low engine oil level for the Maintenance System
warning lamp in the instrument cluster (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles), or Add engine oil as required. Be careful
flashes. changing of oil and oil filter at change inter- not to overfill with oil.
vals longer than those called for by the Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
FSS (Canada Vehicles) will result in engine entering the ground or water.
damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

226
Operation
Engine compartment

! Transmission fluid level


Excess oil must be siphoned or drained Warning! G
off. It could cause damage to the The transmission fluid level does not need
to be checked. If you notice transmission In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions, Use extreme caution when opening the
Warranty. have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light hood if there are any signs of steam or
Truck Center check the automatic trans- coolant leaking from the cooling system,
mission. or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-
Screw filler cap 2 back on filler neck. cates that the coolant is overheated.
For more information on engine oil, see the Coolant level Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
Technical data section ( page 312) and reservoir if coolant temperature is
( page 314). The engine coolant is a mixture of water above 158F (70C). Allow engine to
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check cool down before removing cap. The
the coolant level, the vehicle must be coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and
parked on level ground and the engine is under pressure.
must be cool. Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx-
imately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pres-
sure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out un-
der pressure.
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly-
col which may burn if it comes into con-
tact with hot engine parts.

227
Operation
Engine compartment

Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approx- Battery


imately one half turn to the left to re-
lease any excess pressure. The battery is located in the engine com-
partment.
Continue turning the cap to the left and
remove it. The battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated ser-
Add coolant as required.
vice life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for
Replace and tighten cap. battery maintenance intervals.
For more information on coolant, see the If you use your vehicle mostly for
Technical data section ( page 316). short-distance trips, you will need to have
1 Cap
2 COLD LEVEL mark the battery charge checked more frequent-
ly.
The coolant level should reach the COLD
LEVEL mark 2 in the reservoir. When replacing batteries, always use
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
i If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
If the engine is already at its regular op- for an extended period of time, consult an
erating temperature, the coolant may authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
be approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) above Center about steps you need to observe.
the COLD LEVEL mark.

228
Operation
Engine compartment

G Observe E
all safety instructions Wear eye protection.
and precautions when handling
automotive batteries.
C Keep children away.

A Risk of explosion
F Follow the instructions in this

D Keep flames or sparks away Operators Manual.


from battery. Do not smoke.

B Battery acid is caustic. Do not Batteries contain materials that can harm
allow it to come into contact the environment if disposed of improperly.
with skin, eyes or clothing. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
In case it does, immediately
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
flush affected area with clear
for recycling.
water and seek medical help if
necessary.

229
Operation
Engine compartment

Windshield/rear window washer Use the tab to pull cap 1 upwards


system and headlamp cleaning (arrow). Warning! G
system*
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flam-
Washer Concentrate S and water (or mable. Do not spill washer
The windshield washer reservoir is located
commercially available premixed wind- solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, be-
in the engine compartment.
shield washer solvent/antifreeze, de- cause it may ignite and burn. You could be
pending on ambient temperatures). seriously burned.
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below For more information, see the Technical
freezing point. Failure to do so could data section ( page 319).
result in damage to the washer
system/reservoir.

!
Only use washer fluid which is suitable
1 Cap for plastic lenses. Improper washer
fluid can damage the plastic lenses of
Fluid for the windshield washer system and the headlamps.
the headlamp cleaning system* is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of 8.0 US qt (7.6 l).
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate S to water. Premix
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable
container.

230
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Important guidelines
Truck Center for information on tested and Warning! G
recommended rims and tires for summer Only use sets of tires and rims of the
and winter operation. They can also offer Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the same type and make.
advice concerning tire service and pur- tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
Tires must be of the correct size for the
chase. sustained damage, replace them.
rim.
When replacing rims, use only genuine
Break in new tires for approximately
Warning! G Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
particular rim type. Failure to do so can re-
sult in the bolts loosening and possibly an
speeds.
Replace rims or tires with the same designa-
tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the accident. Regularly check the tires and rims for
original part. See an authorized damage. Dented or bent rims can
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for fur- Retreaded tires are not tested or recom- cause tire pressure loss or damage to
ther information. If incorrectly sized rims mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous the tire beads.
and tires are mounted: damage cannot always be recognized on If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
The wheel brakes or suspension compo- retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore pressure and correct as required.
nents can be damaged. not assure the operating safety of the vehi-
Do not allow your tires to wear down
cle when such tires are used.
The correct operating clearance of the too far. Adhesion properties on wet
wheels and the tires are no longer guar- See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light roads are sharply reduced at tread
anteed. Truck Center for information on tested and depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
recommended rims and tires for summer
When replacing individual tires, you
and winter operation.
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first.

231
Operation
Tires and wheels

! ! Checking tire inflation pressure


When the wheels are heavily soiled, Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
e.g. after driving through mud, clean place with as little exposure to light as
the inside of the wheels with a jet of possible. Protect tires from contact Warning! G
water. with oil, grease and gasoline.
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly:

Life of tire Direction of rotation Check the tires for punctures from
foreign objects.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon Unidirectional tires offer added advantag- Check to see whether air is leaking from
varying factors including but not limited to: es, such as better hydroplaning perfor- the valves or from around the rim.
mance. To benefit, however, you must
Driving style
make sure the tires rotate in the direction Correct the tire pressure only when tires
Tire pressure specified. are cold.
Distance driven An arrow on the sidewall indicates the Regularly check your tire pressure at inter-
intended direction of rotation of the tire. vals of no more than 14 days.
Warning! G If the tires are warm, you should only
correct the tire pressure if it is too low for
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
current operating conditions.
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
A table on the fuel filler flap lists the
specified tire inflation pressures for warm
and cold tires as well as for various
operating conditions.

232
Operation
Tires and wheels

i Rotating wheels
The pressures listed for light loads are
Warning! G
minimum values offering high driving
comfort.
Follow recommended inflation pressures. Warning! G
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
Increased inflation pressures listed for can result in sudden deflation (blowout) Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are
heavier loads may also be used for light because they are more likely to become of the same size,
loads. These higher pressures produce punctured or damaged by road debris,
favorable handling characteristics. The potholes, etc. The wheels can be rotated every 3000 to
ride of the vehicle, however, will be 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km) or soon-
somewhat harder. Never exceed the Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling er if necessary, according to the degree of
max. values or inflate tires below the tire wear. The same direction of tire rota-
min. values listed in the fuel filler flap. and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated. tion must be retained.

Tire pressure changes by approximately Do not overload the tires by exceeding the Rotate the wheels before the characteris-
1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18F (10C) of air Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and tic tire wear pattern becomes visible
temperature change. Keep this in mind the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) as (shoulder wear on front wheels and tread
when checking tire pressure where the indicated on the certification label on the center wear on rear wheels).
temperature is different from the outside drivers door pillar. Overloading the tires can Thoroughly clean the inner side of the
temperature. overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. wheels after each rotation. Check and
Tire temperature and tire pressure are also make sure proper tire inflation pressure.
increased while driving, depending on the Check the spare tire periodically for condi-
driving speed and the tire load. tion and inflation. Spare tire will age and
become worn over time even if never used,
and thus should be inspected and replaced
when necessary.

233
Operation
Tires and wheels

Warning! G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicles rims.

234
Operation
Winter driving
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your vehi- Winter tires Always observe the speed rating of the
cle winterized at an authorized winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. This Always use winter tires at temperatures maximum speed for which your tires are
service includes: below 45F (7C) and whenever wintry rated is below the speed rating of your ve-
road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires hicle, you must place a notice to this effect
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
is the only way to achieve the maximum ef- where it will be seen by the driver. Such no-
concentration.
fectiveness of the ABS, ESP, 4-ETS, and tices are available at your tire dealer or any
Addition of cleaning concentrate to the EBP in winter operation. authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
water of the windshield and headlamp Center.
For safe handling, make sure all winter
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
tires mounted are of the same make and
S to a premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
have the same tread design. Warning! G
for temperatures below freezing point
( page 319). Warning! G If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
Battery test. Battery capacity drops the difference in tire characteristics may
Winter tires with a tread depth under 1/6 in
with decreasing ambient temperature. very well impair turning stability and that
(4 mm) must be replaced. They are no long-
A well charged battery helps to make overall driving stability may be reduced.
er suitable for winter operation.
sure that the engine can be started Adapt your driving style accordingly.
even at low ambient temperatures.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recom- tire at the nearest authorized
mends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
minimum tread depth of approximately
1/ in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the
6
winter season.

235
Operation
Winter driving

Block heater (Canada only) Please observe the following guidelines


when using snow chains:
The engine is equipped with a block
Use of snow chains is not permissible
heater.
with all wheel/tire combinations.
The electrical cable may be installed at an
Snow chains should only be used on all
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
four wheels. With only two chains avail-
Center.
able, they should be mounted on the
rear wheels. Follow the manufacturers
Snow chains
mounting instructions.
Snow chains should only be driven on Only use snow chains that are ap-
snow-covered roads at speeds not to ex- proved by Mercedes-Benz. Your autho-
ceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
as soon as possible when driving on roads Center will be glad to advise you on this
without snow. subject.

i Use of snow chains may be prohibited


depending on location. Always check
When driving with snow chains, you
local and state laws before installing
may wish to deactivate the ESP
snow chains.
( page 81) before setting the vehicle
in motion. This will improve the
vehicles traction.

236
Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have The following information, depending on
your vehicle serviced by an authorized operating conditions throughout the year,
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, in is also shown:
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet
calculated distance remaining
at the times called for by the maintenance
service indicator display. calculated remaining time in days
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in i
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet Vehicles equipped with FSS (Flexible
and maintenance service indicator at the Service System) only (Canada vehi-
designated times/mileage will result in cles): The interval between mainte-
1 Knob
vehicle damage not covered by the nance services depends on your driving
2 Display in the speedometer
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. habits. A gentle driving style, moderate
Starting approximately one month before engine speeds and the avoidance of
The maintenance service indicator will
your maintenance service is due, the type short-distance trips will lengthen the
notify you when your next service is due.
of maintenance service is indicated in the interval between services.
speedometer display 2:
9 Minor service (A) Clearing the maintenance service
Major service (B) indicator

The maintenance service indicator is auto-


matically cleared after ten seconds when
you switch on the ignition or when reach-
ing the service threshold while driving. You
can also clear it yourself.
Press knob 1.

237
Operation
Maintenance

Maintenance service term exceeded Calling up the maintenance service Resetting the maintenance service
indicator indicator
If you have exceeded the suggested
maintenance service term: Within one second press knob 1 In the event that the maintenance service
twice. on your vehicle is not carried out by an au-
the 9 or symbol appears in
thorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen-
the display 2 for 30 seconds and a The maintenance service indicator dis-
ter, you can reset the maintenance service
signal sounds after switching on the play will appear for ten seconds.
indicator yourself.
ignition.
i Switch ignition on and immediately
it is preceded by a (minus symbol).
If the battery is disconnected, the days press knob 1 twice within
The Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will of disconnection will not be included in one second.
reset the maintenance service indicator the count shown by the service indica-
following a completed maintenance The present status for days or distance
tor. To arrive at the true maintenance
service. is displayed.
service deadline, you will need to sub-
tract these days from the days shown Within ten seconds turn the key in
in the maintenance service indicator. steering lock to position 0 ( page 33).
Do not confuse the maintenance ser- Press and hold knob 1 while switch-
vice indicator with the engine oil level ing the ignition on.
indicator :. The present status for days or distance
is displayed once more.

238
Operation
Maintenance

Continue to hold knob 1.


After approximately ten seconds a sig-
nal sounds, and the display shows the
distance to the next maintenance ser-
vice due for approximately
ten seconds.
Release knob 1.

i
If the maintenance service indicator
was inadvertently reset, have a
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center cor-
rect it.
Only reset if the proper maintenance
service has been performed. Resetting
the system without performing the
proper service as called for by the
maintenance service indicator will re-
sult in engine damage and/or other ve-
hicle damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

239
Operation
Vehicle care

Cleaning and care of the vehicle Such damage is caused not only by ex- More frequent washings are necessary to
treme and varying climatic conditions, but deal with unfavorable conditions:
also by:
near the ocean
Warning! G Air pollution
in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Road salt emissions)
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Tar during winter operation
Always follow the instructions on the partic-
ular container. Always open your vehicles Gravel and stone chipping You should check your vehicle from time to
doors or windows when cleaning the inside. time for stone chipping or other damage.
To avoid paint damage, you should imme-
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
Never use fluids or solvents that are not de- diately remove:
possible to prevent corrosion.
signed for cleaning your vehicle. Grease and oil
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
Fuel of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external in- Coolant ough check is a washing of the underbody
fluences which, if gone unchecked, can at- followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-
Brake fluid
tack the paintwork as well as the aged areas need to be re-undercoated.
underbody and cause lasting damage. Bird droppings Your vehicle has been treated at the facto-
Insects ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
Tree resins, etc.
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
Frequent washing reduces and/or elimi- neither necessary nor recommended by
nates the aggressiveness and potency of Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
the above adverse influences. of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others ap-
plied later.

240
Operation
Vehicle care

We have selected car-care products and Power washer Paintwork, painted body components
compiled recommendations which are
When using a power washer for cleaning Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
specially matched to our vehicles and
the vehicle, always observe manufactur- should be applied when water drops on the
which always reflect the latest technology.
ers operating instructions. paint surface do not bead up, normally
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
every three to five months, depending on
car-care products at an authorized ! climate and washing detergent used.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Never use a round nozzle to
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or power-wash tires. The intense jet of
should be applied if the paint surface
damage due to negligent or incorrect care water can result in damage to the tire.
shows signs of dirt embedding (i.e. loss of
cannot always be removed or repaired with Always replace a damaged tire. gloss).
the car-care products recommended here.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at an Always keep the jet of water moving Do not apply any of these products or wax
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck across the surface. Do not aim directly if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
Center. at electrical parts, electrical connec- hood is still hot.
tors, seals, or other rubber parts.
The following topics deal with the cleaning Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick
and care of your vehicle and give important for quick and provisional repairs of minor
Tar stains paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehi-
how-to information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care Quickly remove tar stains before they dry cle doors, etc.).
products. and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
For more information, see the booklet
entitled Vehicle Care Guide.

241
Operation
Vehicle care

Engine cleaning Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif- Ornamental moldings
fused jet of water. Direct only a very weak
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment For regular cleaning and care of very dirty
spray towards the ventilation intake. Use
make sure to protect electrical compo- chrome-plated parts, use a chrome clean-
plenty of water and rinse the sponge and
nents and connectors from the intrusion of er.
chamois frequently.
water and cleaning agents.
Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticor-
with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning turn signal lenses
rosion Wax, should be applied to the en-
agents to dry on the finish.
gine compartment after every engine Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
cleaning. Before applying, all control link- Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in ex- Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
age bushings and joints should be lubricat- terior rear view mirrors prior to running the with plenty of water.
ed. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should vehicle through an automatic car wash to To prevent scratches, never apply strong
be protected from any wax. prevent damage to the mirrors. force and only use a soft, non-scratchy
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not
Vehicle washing of road salt as soon as possible. attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle cloth or sponge.
When washing the underbody, do not for-
in direct sunlight. Use only a mild car wash
get to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz
approved Car Shampoo.

242
Operation
Vehicle care

Cleaning the Parktronic* system To prevent scratches, never apply strong !


sensors force and only use a soft, non-scratchy Fold the windshield wiper arms back
cloth when cleaning the sensor. Do not onto the windshield before turning the
attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry key in the steering lock.
cloth or sponge.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
Wiper blades wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
Fold wiper arms forward. spring could crack the windshield.

Warning! G Window cleaning


Fold wiper arms forward.
1 Parktronic* system sensors For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-
move key from steering lock before cleaning
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as the wiper blades, otherwise the wiper motor Warning! G
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham- might suddenly turn on and cause injury.
poo, with plenty of water to clean the For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-
sensors 1. move key from steering lock before cleaning
Clean the wiper blades inserts with a
When using a steam cleaner or power the windshield, otherwise the wiper motor
clean cloth and detergent solution.
washer, aim nozzle only briefly from a min- might suddenly turn on and cause injury.
imum distance of 12 in (30 cm) at
sensors 1. Use a window cleaning solution on all
glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is recom-
mended.

243
Operation
Vehicle care

! Instrument cluster Hard plastic trim items


Fold the windshield wiper arms back Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
onto the windshield before turning the mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply
key in the steering lock. washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist- with light pressure.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
wiper arm back. If released, the force scouring agents. Headliner and rear window shelf
of the impact from the tensioning Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a
spring could crack the windshield. Steering wheel and gear selector lever
dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly dirt.
Light alloy wheels or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care. Seat belts
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
should be used for regular cleaning of the The webbing must not be treated with
Cup holder chemical cleaning agents. Only use clear,
light alloy wheels.
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the
If possible, clean wheels once a week with
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a webbing at temperatures above 176F
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, us-
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist- (80C) or in direct sunlight.
ing a soft bristle brush and a strong spray
ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
of water.
Follow instructions on container.
scouring agents.
Warning! G
i Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Acid may cause corrosion or damage
the clear coat.

244
Operation
Vehicle care

Upholstery MB Tex upholstery


Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
clothing that has the tendency to give off Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause with light pressure.
the upholstery to become permanently dis-
colored. By lining the seats with a proper Plastic and rubber parts
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
will be prevented.
Wood trims
Leather upholstery*
Dampen cloth using water and use damp
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle.
and dry thoroughly or clean with Do not use solvents like tar remover or
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care. wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
Exercise particular care when cleaning these may be abrasive.
perforated leather as its underside should
not become wet.

245
246
Practical hints
What to do if
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Replacing key batteries
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses

247
Practical hints
What to do if

Lamps in instrument cluster General information: switching on ignition, have it checked and
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to replaced if necessary.
come on during the bulb self-check when

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution


- The yellow ABS malfunction ABS has detected a malfunction and has Continue driving with added caution.
indicator lamp comes on while switched off. The BAS, ESP, and 4-ETS are Wheels may lock during hard braking
driving. also switched off. reducing steering capability.
The brake system is still functioning normally Have the system checked at an autho-
but without ABS available. rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen-
ter as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of an accident.
The charging voltage has fallen below When the voltage is above this value
10 volts. The ABS has switched off. again, the ABS is operational again.
If necessary, have the generator
(alternator) and the battery checked.

248
Practical hints
What to do if

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution


7 The yellow indicator lamp comes A BabySmart TM1
child seat is installed on the
on. front passenger seat. The front passenger
front airbag is therefore switched off.
The system is malfunctioning when there is Have the system checked as soon as
no BabySmartTM child seat installed on the possible by an authorized
front passenger seat. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
7 The yellow indicator lamp does The system is malfunctioning. Make sure there is nothing between
not light up with a BabySmartTM seat cushion and child seat and check
child seat properly installed on installation of the child seat
the front passenger seat. ( page 67).
If the light remains out, have the sys-
tem checked as soon as possible by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint
to transport children on the front pas-
senger seat until the system has been
repaired.
1
Baby SmartTM is trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.

249
Practical hints
What to do if

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution


The red brake warning lamp There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser- Risk of accident! Carefully stop the
comes on while driving. voir. vehicle and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not
solve the problem.
The red brake warning lamp You are driving with the parking brake set. Release the parking brake
comes on while driving and you ( page 48).
hear a warning sound.

!
Warning! G If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi-
minimum mark or below, have the
nated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked for brake pad
brake system checked immediately if the
thickness and leaks.
brake warning lamp stays on. Dont add
brake fluid before checking the brake sys-
tem. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.

250
Practical hints
What to do if

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

- The red brake warning lamp There is a malfunction in the Electronic Brake Have the system checked immediate-
comes on in addition to the yel- Proportioning (EBP) system. ly at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
low ABS indicator lamp and you Light Truck Center.
The enhanced braking effect is not available.
hear a warning sound.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of accidents.
The yellow BAS/ESP indicator The self-diagnosis has not been completed. The BAS/ESP indicator lamp will go out
lamp comes on while driving. after driving a short distance at more
than approx.12 mph (20 km/h).

251
Practical hints
What to do if

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution


The yellow BAS/ESP malfunc- The ESP is no longer synchronized following Synchronize the ESP:
tion indicator lamp comes on a voltage supply interruption (e.g. battery dis- With vehicle stationary and the engine
while driving. connected or discharged). running, turn the steering wheel
completely to the left and then to the
right.
If the BAS/ESP indicator lamp does not
go out:
Continue driving with added caution.
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possi-
ble.
Failure to follow these instructions
increases the risk of an accident.

!
When synchronizing the ESP, make
sure you can turn the steering wheel in
both directions as far as it will go with-
out the wheels hitting any objects, e.g.
a road curb.

252
Practical hints
What to do if

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution


The yellow BAS/ESP malfunc- The charging voltage has fallen below When the voltage is above this value
tion indicator lamp comes on 10 volts. The BAS and the ESP have switched again, the BAS and ESP are operational
while driving. off. again.
If necessary, have the generator and
the battery checked.
The yellow BAS/ESP malfunc- The BAS or the ESP is malfunctioning. Continue driving with added caution.
tion indicator lamp comes on Have the BAS/ESP checked at an au-
while driving. thorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions
increases the risk of an accident.

253
Practical hints
What to do if

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution


? (USA only) The yellow engine malfunction There is a malfunction of: Have the vehicle checked as soon as
(Canada only) indicator lamp comes on while The fuel management possible by an authorized
driving. system Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
An on-board diagnostic connector is
The ignition system used by the service station to link the
The emission control vehicle to the shop diagnostics sys-
system tem. It allows the accurate identifica-
tion of system malfunctions through
Systems which affect the readout of diagnostic trouble
emissions codes. It is located in the front left area
Such malfunctions may result of the footwell next to the parking
in excessive emissions values brake pedal.
and may switch the engine to
its limp-home (emergency op-
eration) mode.

254
Practical hints
What to do if

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution


? (USA only) The yellow engine malfunction A loss of pressure has been Check the fuel cap ( page 219).
indicator lamp comes on while detected in the fuel system.
(Canada only) If it is not closed properly:
driving. The fuel cap may not be closed
properly or the fuel system Close the fuel cap.
may be leaky. If it is closed properly:
Have the fuel system checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
Your fuel tank is empty. After refuelling start the engine three
or four times in succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do
not need to have your vehicle checked.

255
Practical hints
What to do if

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution


/ The yellow coolant warning lamp The coolant is to hot. Stop as soon as possible and allow
comes on when the engine is the engine and coolant to cool down.
The coolant level is too low.
running.
Check the coolant level and add
coolant if necessary ( page 227).
If the warning lamp comes on frequently, Have the cooling system checked by
there is a leak in the cooling system. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
The coolant temperature gauge is above The coolant level is too low. Stop as soon as possible and allow
248F (120C). the engine and coolant to cool down.
Add coolant to prevent engine from
overheating ( page 227).
If the coolant level is correct, the electrical If the coolant temperature is below
radiator fan may be broken. the red zone, immediately to the near-
est authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving
uphill) and stop-and-go driving.

256
Practical hints
What to do if

!
Warning! G Do not ignore the coolant warning
lamps. Extended driving with the sym-
Driving when your engine is badly overheat-
bol displayed may cause serious engine
ed can cause some fluids which may have
damage not covered by the
leaked into the engine compartment to
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
Do not drive without sufficient amount
serious burns and can occur just by opening
of coolant. The engine will overheat,
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
causing major engine damage.
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.

Warning! G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.

257
Practical hints
What to do if

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution


v The yellow 4-ETS/ESP warning The ESP is deactivated. Switch the ESP back on ( page 82).
lamp comes on steady while
Risk of accident! If the ESP cannot be switched back on,
driving.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail- have the system checked at an autho-
ing road and weather conditions. rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
as soon as possible.
v The yellow 4-ETS/ESP warning The ESP or 4-ETS has come into operation During take-off, apply as little throttle
lamp flashes while driving. because of detected traction loss in at least as possible.
one tire.
While driving, ease up on the accele-
rator.
Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather condi-
tions.
Do not deactivate the ESP.
Exceptions: ( page 81).
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of accidents.

258
Practical hints
What to do if

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution


{ The yellow ETS malfunction indi- 4-ETS has switched off to prevent overheat- As soon as the brakes have cooled off,
cator lamp comes on while the ing of the brakes. Also see 4-ETS/ESP warn- 4-ETS switches on again.
4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v ing lamp ( page 258).
The indicator lamp goes out.
flashes.
4-ETS is malfunctioning and has switched off. Have the 4-ETS checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen-
ter as soon as possible.
The yellow LOW RANGE indicator The gear selection conditions have not been Repeat the gear selection process
lamp flashes after one or more adhered to. ( page 127).
switching conditions.
The yellow LOW RANGE indicator LOW RANGE mode is malfunctioning. Have the LOW RANGE mode checked at
lamp flashes after switching the an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
ignition on. Center.
The yellow fuel tank reserve The fuel level has gone below the reserve Refuel at the next gas station
warning lamp comes on while mark. ( page 219).
driving.
The yellow fuel tank reserve The fuel cap is not closed tightly. Check the fuel cap ( page 219).
warning lamp flashes when leav-
ing the engine running.

259
Practical hints
What to do if

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution


: The yellow warning lamp flashes The engine oil level has sunk to the minimum Add approved oil at the next gas
after starting the engine or while level. If the engine oil level continues to sink, station ( page 314).
driving. the warning lamp will light up.
If oil loss is visible on the engine, have
the malfunction corrected as soon as
possible at a Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
_ The red indicator lamp does not The adjustable telescoping steering column Lock the adjustable steering column
go out after starting the engine. is not properly locked. ( page 40).
The green front fog lamp indica- The front fog lamps are switched on. Fog lamps ( page 111).
tor lamp lights up when ignition
is turned on.
< The red seat belt telltale The telltale reminds you to fasten seat belts. Fasten your seat belt ( page 64).
illuminates for a brief period The telltale goes out.
after starting the engine.
W The yellow low washer system There is approximately 1.3 US qt. (1.25 l) of Add washer fluid ( page 230).
fluid level lamp comes on after washer fluid remaining in the reservoir.
starting the engine or while driv- The washer fluid may have frozen. Move the vehicle to a warmer environ-
ing. ment so that the washer fluid will
thaw.
Correct the concentration level after
the washer fluid in the reservoir
thaws.

260
Practical hints
What to do if

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution


# The red charge indicator lamp The battery is no longer charging. Stop immediately and check the
comes on when the engine is Possible causes: poly-V-belt.
running. If it is broken
alternator malfunctioning
Do not continue to drive, before the
broken poly-V-belt
poly-V-belt is replaced.
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
2 The yellow brake indicator lamp The brake pads are worn down. Have the system checked at an autho-
comes on during braking or after rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
starting the engine. Center.

!
Brake pad thickness must be visually
checked by a qualified technician at the
intervals specified in the Maintenance
Booklet.

261
Practical hints
What to do if

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution


1 The red SRS indicator lamp lights There is a malfunction in the restraint sys- Drive with added caution to the near-
up while driving. tems. The airbags or emergency tensioning est authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
device (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or Truck Center.
fail to activate in an accident.

Warning! G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi-
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immedi-
ately to have the system checked, otherwise
the SRS may not be activated when needed
in an accident, which could result in serious
or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpect-
edly and unnecessarily which could result in
an accident/or injury to you or to others.

262
Practical hints
What to do if

Additional indicators in the speedome-


ter display

Display Possible cause Suggested solution


9 Perform minor service (A) ( page 237). Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center to perform service.
Perform major service (B) ( page 237). Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center to perform service.
The immobilizer is not operational. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or
The StArt message comes on in
call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
addition to the Error message.
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Cana-
da).

263
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?

First aid kit Vehicle tool kit

i The vehicle tool kit is stored in the cargo


compartment behind the right trim panel.
Check expiration dates and contents
for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.

The first aid kit is stored in the liftgate.

3 Screw
4 Vehicle jack with tool kit
Turn screw 3 counterclockwise.
1 Handles Remove vehicle jack.
2 Panel Vehicles with CD-changer*
Turn handles 1 90 in direction of ( page 265).
arrows. The jack is exclusively designed for lifting
Open and fold down panel 1. Fold down the panel 2. the vehicle during a wheel change. Always
The first aid kit can be removed. lower the vehicle on sufficient capacity
jackstands before working under the vehi-
cle.

264
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?

Vehicle jack
Make sure that the jack arm is fully seated
Please also observe the safety guidelines in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower
in the Flat tire section ( page 284) the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jack-
when using the jack. stands before working under the vehicle.

Warning! G Vehicle with CD-changer*


To access the vehicle tool kit, swing the
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking CD-changer out of the panel.
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
1 Vehicle jack built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
2 Wheel bolt wrench avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
3 Screwdriver the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
4 Interchangeable slot get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
Screwdriver 3 is placed inside the wheel- the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
bolt wrench handle. firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is 1 Screw
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es- 2 CD-changer
pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack
Turn screw 1 counterclockwise.
on level surface.
Swing the CD-changer 2 out of the
panel.

265
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?

Spare wheel (space-saver tire) Removing spare wheel

Use the spare wheel only temporarily,


while observing the following restrictions: Warning! G
Do not exceed vehicle speed of Exercise care when removing or installing
50 mph (80 km/h). spare wheel to prevent personal injury.
Drive to the nearest repair facility to
have the flat tire repaired or replaced The spare wheel is located behind the rear
as appropriate. bumper.
Do not operate vehicle with more than 2 Screw
one spare wheel mounted. 3 Spare wheel carrier
4 Lever
Warning! G Turn screw 2 counterclockwise using
the wrench ( page 265).
The dimensions of the spare wheel are dif-
Screw 2 remains in spare wheel
ferent from those of the road wheels. As a
carrier 3.
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a mounted spare Lift spare wheel carrier slightly and
wheel. push lever 4 to the right using screw-
1 Cover
driver ( page 264).
Hold left and right side of cover 1 and
i Swing spare wheel carrier 3 down and
pull away from bumper.
Please comply with the instructions for pull it out from under the bumper.
Mounting the spare wheel
( page 284).

266
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?

!
When storing the space-saver spare
wheel in its holder, secure it using the
bayonet lock.

5 Bayonet lock
Turn the bayonet lock 5 90 to the
left.
Pull off bayonet lock 5.
Remove the spare wheel cover and the
spare wheel.
Store bayonet lock 5 and spare wheel
cover in cargo compartment.
Replace the spare wheel carrier and se-
cure it in place.
Install cover 1 to the bumper.

267
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency

Unlocking the vehicle Remote control with folding key Unlocking the drivers door

If you are unable to unlock the drivers


door using the remote control, open the
door using the folding key.

i
Unlocking the drivers door with the
folding key will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the
following: 1 Release button 1 Unlocking
Press button or on the Press release button 1 on the remote Insert the key into the drivers door
remote control. control. lock until it stops.
Insert the key in the steering lock. The key folds out. Turn the key counterclockwise to
position 1.
The drivers door is unlocked.

268
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency

Locking the vehicle Fuel filler flap

If you are unable to lock the vehicle with


the remote control, lock it with the folding
key as follows:
Close the passenger doors and the lift-
gate.
Press the upper part of the central
locking switch in the cockpit
( page 93). 1 Locking
Check to see whether the locking Insert the key into the drivers door 1 Cover
knobs on the passenger doors have lock until it stops. 2 Lock rod
moved down. If necessary push them
down manually. Turn the key clockwise to position 1. Open the liftgate.
Lock the liftgate if necessary from in- The drivers door is locked. Open cover 1 in cargo compartment
side ( page 91). behind the left trim panel.
Except for the drivers door, the vehicle Turn lock rod 2 clockwise (arrow) to
should now be locked. the end stop.
The fuel filler flap can now be opened.

269
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency

Manually unlocking the transmission Insert a pin 1, e.g. ball point pen, into
gear selector lever the covered opening below the
position D of the shift pattern.
In the case of power failure the transmis-
Perform the following two steps simul-
sion gear selector lever can be manually
taneously:
unlocked, e.g. to tow the vehicle.
Push the pin down.
Move gear selector lever from
position P.
Remove pin 1.
The cover returns to its closed position
after moving the gear selector lever to
position D.

i
1 Pin The gear selector lever is locked again
when moving it to position P.

270
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* Take crank 2 out of the Operators
Manual pouch.
You can open or close the tilt/sliding
Insert crank 2 through hole 1.
sunroof manually should an electrical
malfunction occur. i
The tilt/sliding sunroof drive is located be- Push crank 2 upward while turning to
hind cover 3 between the front interior disengage the electric motor.
lamps.
Turn crank 2 clockwise to:
slide sunroof closed
raise sunroof at the rear
Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to:
slide sunroof open
lower sunroof at the rear

i
1 Hexagon drive hole Turn crank 2 slowly and smoothy.
2 Crank
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be syn-
3 Cover
chronized if it has been operated man-
Remove the key from the steering lock. ually ( page 152).
Pry off cover 3 using a flat blade
srewdriver.

271
Practical hints
Replacing key batteries

If the batteries in the remote control are Batteries contain materials that can harm i
discharged, the vehicle can no longer be the environment if disposed of improperly. When replacing batteries, always
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to Recycling of batteries is the preferred replace both batteries.
have the batteries replaced at an autho- method of disposal. Many states require
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. sellers of batteries to accept old batteries The required replacement batteries are
for recycling. available at any Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Warning! G
Keep the batteries out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.

272
Practical hints
Replacing key batteries

Remote control Synchronizing remote control


Turn key in steering lock to position 2
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
( page 33), then to position 0 and re-
CR 2025 or equivalent.
move.
Within ten seconds, push and hold
button while pushing
button five times.
Release the button, and press ,
or once.
i The remote control is resynchronized.
When inserting the batteries, make
Recheck all of the remote control func-
sure they are clean and free of lint.
tions.
1 Release button
2 Battery cover Using a lint-free cloth, insert new bat- i
teries under the contact spring with the If it is not possible to resynchronize the
Unfold the key by pressing release plus (+) side facing up. remote control, have the system
button 1.
Press battery cover 2 onto housing checked at an authorized
Pull off battery cover 2 in direction of until locked in place. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
arrow.
Push each button to assure proper op-
Remove the batteries. eration of the remote control.
If remote control does not function cor-
rectly after replacing the batteries, the
system may have to be resynchronized.

273
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs

Bulbs Front lamps

Safe vehicle operation depends on proper Lamp Type


exterior lighting and signaling. It is there- 1 Front Fog lamp H8 (35 W)
fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as-
semblies are in good working order at all 2 High beam H7 (55 W)
times. Parking, standing lamp 5 W 5
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely 3 Low beam1 H7 (55 W)
important. Have headlamps checked and Xenon*:
readjusted at regular intervals and when a D2S-35 W
bulb has been replaced. See an authorized 4 Turn signal and side 1157 NA
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for marker lamp (32/3 cp
headlamp adjustment. bulb)
i 5 Additional turn signal LED
Backup bulbs will be brought into use lamp
when the following lamps malfunction: 1 Vehicles with Xenon* headlamps: Do not replace
the Xenon bulbs yourself. See your authorized
Turn signal lamps Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Parking lamps
i
Tail lamps
If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
fogged up on the inside as a result of
high humidity, driving the vehicle a dis-
tance with the lights on should clear up
the fogging.

274
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs

Rear lamps Notes on bulb replacement


Warning! G Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type
Lamp Type
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. and with the specified watt rating.
6 Brake lamp 1073
Allow the lamp to cool down before chang- Switch lights off before changing a bulb
(32 cp bulb)
ing a bulb. to prevent short circuits.
7 Backup lamp 1073
Keep bulbs out of reach of children. Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
(32 cp bulb)
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. handling bulbs.
8 Turn signal lamp PY 21 W
A bulb can explode if you: Your hands should be dry and free of oil
9 Side marker lamp W5W
touch or move it when hot and grease.
a Tail, parking, standing P 21/4 W
drop the bulb If the newly installed bulb does not
lamp, rear fog lamp
scratch the bulb come on, visit an authorized
(only drivers side)
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Wear eye and hand protection.
b High mounted brake 1073
lamp (32 cp bulb) Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
c License plate lamps C5W
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.

275
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs

Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following Replacing bulbs for front lamps
lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center: Before you start to replace a bulb for a
front lamp, do the following first:
Additional turn signals in the exterior
rear view mirrors Turn the combination switch to
position D ( page 107).
Xenon*-lamps
Open the hood ( page 222).
Front fog lamps (vehicles with sport
package*)
Replacing low beam bulbs
High mounted brake lamp (only vehi-
2 Electrical connector
cles with an exterior spare-wheel
rack*)
Bi-Xenon* headlamp

Warning! G
Do not remove the cover 1 for the
Bi-Xenon* headlamp. Because of high volt-
age in Xenon* lamps, it is dangerous to re-
1 Low beam halogen or Bi-Xenon* hous- place the bulb or repair the lamp and its
ing cover with locking tab components. We recommend that you have
such work done by a qualified technician.

276
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs

Low beam halogen headlamp High beam halogen bulb (vehicles with
halogen bulbs: high beam and high
Press down the tab on top end of hous-
beam flasher; vehicles with Xenon*
ing cover 1 and remove it in direction
headlamps: high beam flasher only),
of arrow.
parking and standing lamp
Pull electrical connector 2 off.
Unclip the retainer spring on the bulb
socket and take out of the bulb.
Insert the new bulb so that its socket
locates in the recess of the lamp hous-
2 Electrical connector for high beam
ing.
halogen bulb (vehicles with halogen
Clip on the retainer spring. bulbs: high beam and high beam flash-
Plug electrical connector 2 onto the er; vehicles with Xenon* headlamps:
bulb. high beam flasher only)
1 Housing cover for high beam halogen 3 Bulb socket for parking and standing
Align housing cover 1 and press until bulb (vehicles with halogen bulbs: high lamp bulb
it engages. beam and high beam flasher; vehicles
with Xenon* headlamps: high beam
flasher only), parking and standing
lamp

277
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs

High beam halogen bulb (vehicles with Parking/standing lamp bulb Turn signal bulb/side marker bulb
halogen bulbs: high beam and high
Turn housing cover 1 counterclock-
beam flasher; vehicles with Xenon*
wise and remove it.
headlamps: high beam flasher only)
Pull out bulb socket 3 with the bulb.
Turn housing cover 1 counterclock-
wise and remove it. Press gently onto the bulb and turn
counterclockwise out of bulb
Pull electrical connector 2 off. socket 3.
Unclip the retainer spring on the bulb
Press the new bulb gently into bulb
socket and take out the bulb.
socket 3 and turn clockwise until it
Insert the new bulb so that its socket engages.
1 Bulb socket
locates in the recess of the lamp hous-
Press bulb socket 3 back into the
ing. Twist bulb socket 1 counterclockwise
lamp.
and pull out.
Clip on the retainer spring. Align housing cover 1 and turn it
Push bulb into socket, turn counter-
Plug electrical connector 2 onto the clockwise.
clockwise and remove.
bulb.
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
Align housing cover 1 and turn it
twist clockwise.
clockwise.
Reinstall the bulb socket 1.

278
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs

Front fog lamp Replacing bulbs for rear lamps

Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear


lamp, do the following first:
Turn the combination switch to
position D ( page 107).

Tail lamp unit

2 Bulb socket of front fog lamp bulb


1 Front fog lamp 3 Tabs
Use a suitable object (e.g. screwdriver) Turn bulb socket 2 with the bulb
to press on the release lever behind the counterclockwise and remove it.
front panel. Insert new bulb socket 2 with the bulb
Front fog lamp 1 releases. into the lamp and turn it clockwise.
Pull front fog lamp 1 out of the Reinstall front fog lamp 1 into the
bumper. bumper. 1 Hexagon cap nut (with washer)
Let tabs 3 engage in the bumper. 2 Rear fog lamp (only drivers side), tail
lamp, parking and standing lamp
3 Side marker lamp
4 Turn signal lamp
5 Backup lamp
6 Brake lamp

279
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs

Open the liftgate. Rear side marker


Remove hexagon cap nuts 1 with Open the liftgate.
washers on them.
Remove hexagon cap nuts 1 with
Remove tail lamp unit. washers on them.
Press tabs 7 together. Remove tail lamp unit.
Remove the bulb carrier. Turn bulb socket 8 with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.
Press gently onto the respective bulb
and turn counterclockwise out of its Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 8.
7 Tab bulb socket. Press the new bulb into bulb socket 8.
Press the new bulb gently into its bulb
Insert bulb socket 8 back into the
socket and turn clockwise until it en-
lamp and turn it clockwise.
gages.
Insert the tail lamp unit in the body,
Reinstall the bulb carrier.
lower edge first.
Let tabs 7 engage. Let the tail lamp unit engage.
Insert the tail lamp unit in the body,
Retighten hexagon cap nuts 1 with
lower edge first.
washers on them.
Let the tail lamp unit engage.
8 Bulb socket for rear side marker lamp Retighten hexagon cap nuts 1 with
bulb washers on them.

280
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs

License plate lamp High mounted brake lamp Press gently onto the bulb and turn
counterclockwise out of the bulb sock-
et.
Press the new bulb gently into the bulb
socket and turn clockwise until it en-
gages.
Reinstall the reflector on the left side
first and let it engage on the right side.
Align cover 1 with its tabs in the slots
and press gently onto cover 1 until it
1 License plate lamp 1 Cover engages.
2 Screw 2 Tab
i
Loosen both screws 2. Press gently on both sides of cover 1
in direction of arrows. Vehicles with an exterior spare-wheel
Remove license plate lamp 1. rack*:
Fold it backwards and remove. You cannot replace the LEDs of the
Replace the tubular bulb.
Press tab 2 on the reflector and re- high mounted brake light with an exte-
Reinstall license plate lamp 1.
move it. rior spare-wheel rack installed. Have
Retighten screws 2. therefore the high mounted brake light
checked and, if necessary, the LEDs re-
placed by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

281
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs

Adjusting headlamp aim Park the vehicle on a level surface Always turn adjustment screws 2
25 feet (7.6 m) from a vertical test and 3 simultaneously for vertical ad-
screen or wall. justment until the headlamp is adjust-
ed as shown 1. Turn clockwise for
Switch the headlamps on
upward movement and counterclock-
( page 107).
wise for downward movement.
If the beam does not show a beam pattern
Graduations:
as indicated in the figure left, then follow
the steps below: screw 2: 0.50 pitch
Open hood ( page 222). screw 3: 0.67 pitch
The left and right headlamps must be ad-
V Vertical centerline justed individually.
H Headlamp mounting high, measured
from the center i
If it is not possible to obtain a proper
i headlamp adjustment, have the system
High beam adjustments simultaneous- checked at an authorized
ly aim the low beam. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Vehicle should have a normal trunk
load.
2 Headlamp vertical adjustment screw
3 Headlamp vertical adjustment screw
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. To check and readjust a head-
lamp, follow the steps described:

282
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Replacing wiper blades
Removing Press safety tab down 2. !
Push wiper blade downward 1 and Never open the hood when the wiper
remove. arms are folded forward.
Warning! G
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
Installing wiper arm back. If released, the force
For safety reasons, remove key from steer-
ing lock before replacing a wiper blade. Oth- of the impact from the tensioning
Slide the wiper blade into end of wiper
erwise the motor could suddenly turn on and spring could crack the windshield.
arm until it locks in place.
cause injury. Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
Fold the wiper arm back to rest on the the windshield glass without a wiper
Fold the wiper arm forward. windshield. Make sure you hold onto blade inserted.
the wiper when folding the wiper arm
Turn wiper blade at a right angle to wip- back. Make certain that the wiper blades are
er arm. properly installed. Improperly installed
wiper blades may cause windshield
damage.
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

1 Wiper blade
2 Safety tab

283
Practical hints
Flat tire

Mounting the spare wheel Preparing the vehicle Lifting the vehicle
Park the vehicle as far as possible from Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
moving traffic on a hard surface. by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
Warning! G (not included) or other sizable objects.
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
The dimensions of the spare wheel are dif-
Engage the steering wheel lock in the When changing wheel on a level surface:
ferent from those of the road wheels. As a
straight ahead position. Place one chock in front of and one be-
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
hind the wheel that is diagonally oppo-
change when driving with a mounted spare Set the parking brake.
site to the wheel being changed.
wheel. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Move the gear selector lever to P.
When changing wheel on a hill:
The spare wheel is for temporary use only. Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
When driving with spare wheel mounted, Place chocks on the downhill side
a safe distance from the roadway.
make sure proper tire pressure and do not blocking both wheels of the other axle.
exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). i Take the two-piece wheel wrench and
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Open door only when conditions are the jack out of the rear cargo compart-
Truck Center as soon as possible to have the safe to do so. ment ( page 264). Assemble wheel
spare wheel replaced with a regular road wrench.
wheel. Take the spare wheel out of its carrier
Never operate the vehicle with more than ( page 266).
one spare wheel mounted.

284
Practical hints
Flat tire

Warning! G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always On wheel to be changed, loosen but do 1 Take-up bracket
firmly set parking brake and block wheels not yet remove the wheel bolts 2 Jack
before raising vehicle with jack. (approximately one full turn with Place jack on firm ground.
Do not disengage parking brake while the wrench).
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is Position jack 2 under the take-up
The jack take-up brackets are located di- bracket 1 so that it is always vertical
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es- rectly behind the front wheel housings and
pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack (plumb-line) as seen from the side,
in front of the rear wheel housings. even if the vehicle is parked on an in-
on level surface. Make sure that the jack
arm is fully seated in the jack take-up brack- ! cline.
et. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient Do not position the jack on the body of Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle, as this may cause damage maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
the vehicle. to the vehicle. ground. Never start engine while vehi-
cle is raised.

285
Practical hints
Flat tire

Removing the wheel !


Unscrew and remove all wheel bolts. To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat Warning! G
against hub and hold it there while in-
Remove the remaining bolts. Use only genuine equipment
stalling first wheel bolt.
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel
! bolts may come loose.
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the bolt Warning! G Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the ve-
hicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
and wheel hub threads. tip over.
Always replace wheel bolts that are
damaged or rusted.
Grip the wheel from the sides and re-
move it. Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be
Mounting the new wheel repaired immediately. Do not continue to
drive under these circumstances! Contact
Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
wheel hub.
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
Install spare wheel on wheel hub.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight-
Insert wheel bolts and tighten them ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
slightly. come off. This could cause an accident.
Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts.

286
Practical hints
Flat tire

Lowering the vehicle Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, fol- i
lowing the diagonal sequence illustrat- The removed road wheel cannot be
Lower vehicle by turning crank coun-
ed (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight. stored in the spare wheel carrier, but
terclockwise until vehicle is resting ful-
Observe a tightening torque of should be transported in the rear cargo
ly on its own weight.
110 lb-ft (150 Nm). compartment wrapped in a protective
Remove the jack.
cover supplied with the vehicle.
Warning! G The protective cover is located in the
rear cargo compartment behind the
Have the tightening torque checked after
cover in the right side trim panel.
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).

Store jack and tool kit.

1-5 Wheel bolts

287
Practical hints
Battery

The battery is located on the passenger !


side of the engine compartment. Warning! G Never loosen or detach battery termi-
nal clamps while the engine is running
Failure to follow these instructions can
or the key is in the steering lock. Other-
result in severe injury or death.
wise the alternator and other electronic
Observe all safety instructions and precau- components could be severely dam-
tions when handling automotive batteries aged.
( page 228).
Have the battery checked regularly by
Never lean over batteries while connecting, an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
you might get injured. Truck Center.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not Refer to Maintenance Booklet for main-
1 Negative terminal allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, tenance intervals or contact an autho-
2 Positive terminal skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
flush affected area with water and seek Center for further information.
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep Warning! G
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables, Do not place metal objects on the battery as
smoking etc. this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.

288
Practical hints
Battery

Disconnecting the battery Removing the battery Reconnecting the battery

Remove the screw securing the Turn off all electrical consumers.
Warning! G battery.
Connect the positive lead and fasten its
Remove the battery support and cover.
With a disconnected battery
bracket.
Connect the negative lead.
you will no longer be able to turn the key
Take out the battery.
in the steering lock !
the gear selector lever will remain Never invert the terminal connections!
Charging and reinstalling the battery
locked in position P

!
Depress parking brake firmly or move Warning! G The battery, its filler caps and the vent
gear selector lever to position P.
tube must always be securely installed
Never charge a battery while still installed in
Turn off all electrical consumers. when the vehicle is in operation.
the vehicle. Gases may escape during charg-
Remove key from the steering lock. ing and cause explosions that may result in
Open the hood ( page 222). paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.

Disconnect the battery negative lead.


Charge battery in accordance with the
Remove the cover from the positive ter- instructions of the battery charger
minal. manufacturer.
Disconnect the battery positive lead. Reinstall the charged battery. Follow
the previously described steps in re-
verse order.

289
Practical hints
Battery

i Batteries contain materials that can harm


The following procedures must be car- the environment if disposed of improperly.
ried out following any interruption of Large 12 volt storage batteries contain
battery power (e.g. due to reconnec- lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
tion): method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
Set the clock ( page 119). for recycling.
Set the date in trip computer
( page 189).
Calibrate the compass
( page 191).
Resynchronize the ESP
( page 252).
Resynchronize side power windows
( page 148).
Resynchronize tilt/sliding
sunroof*( page 152).

290
Practical hints
Jump starting
Jump starting
If the battery is discharged, the engine can !
Warning! G be started with jumper cables and the Avoid repeated and lengthy starting at-
battery of another vehicle. Observe the tempts.
Failure to follow these directions will cause following:
damage to the electronic components, and Do not attempt to start the engine
Jump starting should only be performed using a battery quick charge unit.
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death. when the engine and catalytic convert-
er are cold. If engine does not run after several
Never lean over batteries while connecting unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
or jump starting, you might get injured. Do not start the engine if the battery is checked at the nearest authorized
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, Only jump start from batteries with the Excessive unburned fuel generated by
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately same voltage rating (12 V). Jump start- repeated failed starting attempts may
flush affected area with water, and seek ing with a more powerful battery could damage the catalytic converter and
medical help if necessary. damage the vehicles electrical system, may present a fire risk.
which will not be covered by the
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, Make sure the jumper cables do not
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep have loose or missing insulation.
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid Only use jumper cables with sufficient
improper connection of jumper cables, cross-section and insulated terminal Make sure the cable clamps do not
smoking, etc. clamps. touch any other metal part while the
other end is still attached to a battery.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery Always make sure the jumper cables
can result in it exploding, causing personal are not on or near pulleys, fans, or oth-
injury. er parts that move when the engine is
Read all instructions before proceeding. started or running.

291
Practical hints
Jump starting

Start engine of the vehicle with the


Warning! G charged battery and run at idle speed.
Connect negative terminals 2 and 3
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke. of the batteries with the jumper cable.
Clamp cable to negative terminal 2 of
Observe all safety instructions and precau- charged battery first.
tions when handling automotive batteries
( page 228). Start the engine of the disabled vehi-
cle.
The battery is located on the passenger Now you can turn on the electrical
side of the engine compartment. 1 Positive terminal of charged battery consumers. Do not turn on the lights under
2 Negative terminal of charged battery any circumstances.
Make sure the two vehicles do not 3 Negative terminal of discharged
touch. Remove the jumper cables first from
battery
the negative terminals 3 and 2 and
Turn off all electrical consumers. 4 Positive terminal of discharged battery
then from positive terminals 4
Apply parking brake. Connect positive terminals 1 and 4 and 1.
of the batteries with the jumper cable.
Shift gear selector lever to position P. You can now turn on the lights.
Clamp cable to positive terminal 1 of
Open the hood. charged battery first. Have the battery checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
! Light Truck Center.
Never invert the terminal connections!
!
Do not tow-start the vehicle.

292
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the When circumstances do not permit the !
vehicle be transported with all wheels off recommended towing methods, the To be certain to avoid additional dam-
the ground using flatbed or appropriate vehicle may be towed with all wheels on age to the vehicle powertrain, however
wheel lift/dolly equipment. This method is the ground only so far as necessary to have you should observe the following:
preferable to other types of towing. the vehicle moved to a safe location where
the recommended towing methods can be With damage to the front axle
! employed. raise front axle
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equip-
ment, with key in steering lock turned ! remove flexible drive shaft be-
to position 0. When towing the vehicle with all wheels tween rear axle and transfer
on the ground, the gear selector lever case
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
must be in position N and the key must With damage to the rear axle
Towing with sling-type equipment over
be in steering lock position 2.
bumpy roads will damage radiator and raise rear axle
supports. When towing the vehicle with all wheels
tow vehicle with wheel lift or
To prevent damage during transport, on the ground, the vehicle may be
dolly placed under front wheels
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or towed only for distances up to 30 miles
(50 km) and at a speed not to exceed With damage to the transfer case
suspension parts. Use the towing eyes.
30 mph (50 km/h). remove flexible drive shaft to
Switch off the ESP ( page 81),
If the vehicle is towed with the front the drive axles
tow-away alarm ( page 85) and the
axle raised (observe instructions re- Always install new self-locking nuts
automatic central locking ( page 93).
garding flexible drive shaft), the engine when reinstalling flexible drive shaft.
must be shut off (key in steering lock
position 1). Otherwise, the 4-ETS may
become engaged which may cause loss
of towing control.

293
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle

i
Warning! G Warning! G The vehicle cannot be started via
tow-start.
If circumstances require towing the vehicle With the engine not running, there is no
with all wheels on the ground, always tow power assistance for the brake and steering
with a tow bar if: systems. In this case, it is important to keep i
the engine will not run in mind that a considerably higher degree of If the battery is disconnected or dis-
effort is necessary to brake and steer the charged, the gear selector lever will re-
there is a malfunction in the power sup-
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly. main locked in position P and the key
ply or in the vehicles electrical system
will not turn in the steering lock. For
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on more information, see Battery
the ground, make sure the key is in steering i
( page 272) and Jump starting
lock position 2. To signal turns while being towed with
( page 291).
hazard warning flasher in use, turn key
If the key is left in steering lock position 0
in steering lock to position 2 and acti- For information on manual unlocking
for an extended period of time, it can no
vate combination switch for left or right transmission gear selector lever, see
longer be turned in the switch. In this case,
turn signal in usual manner only the ( page 270).
the steering is locked. To unlock, remove
selected turn signal will operate.
key from steering lock and reinsert.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the
hazard warning flasher will operate
again.

294
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle

! Front towing eye The rear towing eye is located behind the
When towing the vehicle with all wheels right side cover in the bumper panel.
on the ground, note the following: The front towing eye is located on the
passenger side below the bumper.
With the automatic central locking
activated and the key in steering lock
position 2, the vehicle doors lock if the
left front wheel is turning at vehicle
speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more.
To prevent the vehicle doors from
locking, deactivate the automatic
central locking ( page 93). 1 Cover
2 Towing eye
Towing of the vehicle should only be
1 Towing eye
done using the towing eye. Never To remove cover:
attach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod Pry out the cover 1 using a flat blade
Rear towing eye
to vehicle chassis, frame or suspension screwdriver ( page 264).
parts.
To reinstall cover:
Warning! G
Engage cover at bottom and press in
In order to avoid possible serious burns or top securely.
injury, use extreme caution when removing
the cover, because the rear exhaust pipe is
extremely hot.

295
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle

Stranded vehicle

Freeing a stranded vehicle, on which the


wheels are dug into sand or mud, should
be done with the greatest of care, especial-
ly if the vehicle is heavily loaded.
Avoid pulling the vehicle jerkily or diago-
nally, since it could result in damage to the
chassis alignment.

Vehicles with sport package* Never try to free a vehicle that is still cou-
pled to a trailer.
1 Cover
2 Towing eye If possible, a vehicle equipped with trailer
hitch receiver should be pulled backward
To remove cover: in its own previously made tracks.
Grip cover 1 at bottom and securely
pull out.
To reinstall cover:
Engage cover and press in securely.

296
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuses
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to The electrical fuses are located in different
stop the supply of electricity to a device Warning! G fuse boxes:
that is malfunctioning. This helps to
Main fuse box in engine compartment
prevent damage to the other vehicle Only use fuses approved for Mercedes-Benz
with the specified amperage for the system ( page 298)
electronics.
in question. Otherwise, a short circuit could Fuse box in front passenger footwell
The following aids are available to help you result and cause a fire. ( page 299)
change fuses ( page 298):
Fuse chart !
Spare fuses Only install fuses that have been tested
Fuse extractor and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
that have the specified amperage
rating.
Otherwise, electrical parts or systems
could be damaged.
Never attempt to repair or bridge a
blown fuse. Have the cause determined
and remedied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

297
Practical hints
Fuses

Aids for changing fuses Main fuse box

The main fuse box is located in the engine


Fuse chart compartment on the drivers side.
A chart explaining fuse allocation and fuse
amperages can be found in the main fuse
box in the engine compartment
( page 298).

Spare fuses
Spare fuses are found in the main fuse box
in the engine compartment ( page 298).

Fuse extractor
1 Clamps
The fuse extractor is found in the main fuse 2 Main fuse box cover 3 Fuse chart
box in the engine compartment 4 Fuse extractor
( page 298). Removing/installing main fuse box 5 Spare fuses
cover
Opening the hood.
Release clamps 1.
Lift fuse box cover 2 up.
Install main fuse box cover in reverse
order.

298
Practical hints
Fuses

Fuse box in front passenger footwell Removing/installing cover


Open passenger-side door.
The fuse box is located in the front
passenger compartment. Turn both locks 1
90 counterclockwise.
Remove cover 2 in direction of arrow.
Install cover 2 in reverse order.

1 Lock
2 Cover

299
300
Technical data
Parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main Dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Consumer information

301
Technical data
Parts service

The Technical data section provides the All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers !
necessary technical data for your vehicle. maintain a stock of genuine The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz parts required for mainte- parts and accessories not authorized
nance and repair work. In addition, strate- by Mercedes-Benz could damage the
gically located parts distribution centers vehicle, which is not covered by the
provide quick and reliable parts service. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
More than 300 000 different parts for could compromise the vehicles
Mercedes-Benz models are available. durability or safety.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject-
ed to stringent quality inspections. Each
part has been specifically developed, man-
ufactured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.

302
Technical data
Warranty coverage
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of Replacement parts and accessories are Loss of Service and Warranty
the warranties printed in the Service and covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Information Booklet
Warranty Information booklet. Your Accessories warranties, copies of which
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck are available at any Mercedes-Benz Light Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Center will exchange or repair any defec- Truck Center. Information booklet, have an authorized
tive parts originally installed on the vehicle Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center arrange
in accordance with the terms of the follow- for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
ing warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emission System Warranty
Emission Performance Warranty
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty

303
Technical data
Identification labels

i
When ordering parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine num-
bers.

1 Certification label (includes Paintwork 2 Engine number (engraved on engine)


code) 3 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)
4 Emission control information label,
includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission stan-
dards
5 Vacuum line routing diagram label for
emission control system

304
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Layout of poly-V-belt drive

1 Automatic belt tensioner


2 Power steering pump
3 Air conditioning compressor
4 Crankshaft
5 Coolant pump
6 Generator (alternator)
7 Idler pulley

305
Technical data
Engine

Model ML 350 (163.1571) ML 500 (163.175)1


Engine 112 113
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 6 8
Bore 3.81 in (97.00 mm) 3.81 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke 3.31 in (84.00 mm) 3.31 in (84.00 mm)
3
Total piston displacement 227 cu in (3724 cm ) 303 cu in (4966 cm3)
Compression ratio 10:1 10:1
2
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 232 hp/5750 rpm 288 hp/5600 rpm 2
(173 kW/5750 rpm) (215 kW/5600 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 254 lb-ft/3000-4500 rpm 325 lb-ft/2700 rpm
(345 Nm/3000-4500 rpm) (440 Nm/2700 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6000 rpm 6000 rpm
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 2370 mm 2370 mm
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special
equipment.
2
Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.

306
Technical data
Rims and tires
Rims and tires
Only use tires and rims which have been ! i
specifically developed for your vehicle and Moreover, tires and rims not approved Further information on tires and rims is
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, available at any authorized
Other tires and rims can have detrimental exhibit dimensional variations and Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. A
effects, such as different tire deformation characteris- tire inflation pressure table is located
poor handling characteristics tics that could cause them to come into on the fuel filler cap of the vehicle. The
contact with the vehicle body or axle tire pressure should be checked regu-
increased noise
parts. This may result in damage to the larly and should only be adjusted on
increased fuel consumption tires or the vehicle. cold tires. Follow tire manufacturers
maintenance recommendation includ-
ed with vehicle.

Rims and tires

Model ML 350 ML 500


Rims (light alloy) 8 J x 17 H2 8 1/2 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset 2.0 in (52 mm) 2.0 in (52 mm)
All-season tires (radial-ply tires) 255/60 R17 106 H 275/55 R17 109 V
1
Rims* (light alloy) 8 /2 J x 17 H2 8 1/2 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset* 1.85 in (47 mm) 1.85 in (47 mm)
All-season tires (radial-ply tires)* 275/55 R17 109 V 275/55 R17 109 V

307
Technical data
Rims and tires

Spare wheel

Model ML 350, ML 500


Rim 4 Jx18 H2 ET0
Wheel offset 0 in (0 mm)
Space-saver tire T155/90 D18 113M1
1
Must not be used with snow chains.

308
Technical data
Electrical system
Electrical system
Model ML 350 ML 500
Generator (alternator) 14 V/120 A 14 V/150 A
Starter motor 12 V/1.7 kW 12 V/1.7 kW
Battery 12 V/100 Ah 12 V/100 Ah
Spark plugs Bosch F 8 DPP332 Bosch F 8 DPP332
Bosch F 8 DPER Bosch F 8 DPER
Electrode gap 0.039 in (1.0 mm) 0.039 in (1.0 mm)
Tightening torque 15 22 lb-ft (20 30 Nm) 15 22 lb-ft (20 30 Nm)

309
Technical data
Main Dimensions

Model ML 350, ML 500


Overall vehicle length 182.6 in (4638 mm)
Overall vehicle width 83.7 in (2126 mm)
Overall vehicle height 71.7 in (1820 mm)
Wheelbase 111.0 in (2820 mm)
Track, front 61.2 in (1555 mm)
Track, rear 61.2 in (1555 mm)
Ground clearance 8.03 in (204 mm)
Turning radius 468.5 in (11.9 m)

310
Technical data
Weights
Weights

Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)

311
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Capacities Therefore only use products tested and Please refer to the Factory Approved
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at
Vehicle components and their respective your Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
lubricants must match.

Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.


Engine with oil filter ML 350, ML 500 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Approved engine oils
Automatic transmis- 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) MB Automatic Transmission Oil
sion
Transfer case 1.6 US qt (1.5 l) (Dexron 3 or Dexron 2E)
Rear axle 1.3 US qt (1.25 l) (Hypoid gear oil SAE 90, 85 W 90)
Front axle 1.2 US qt (1.1 l) (Hypoid gear oil SAE 90)
Power steering approx. 0.65 US qt (0.6 l) MB Power Steering Fluid
Front wheel hubs approx. 1.5 oz (43 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease

312
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.


Cooling system approx. 12.7 US qt (12.0 l) MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
Fuel Tank ML 350, ML 500 22.0 US gal (83.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline:
Minimum Posted Octane 91
including a reserve of approx. 3.2 US gal (12.0 l)
(Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
Air conditioning system R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil
(never R-12)
Windshield washer and 8.0 US qt (7.6 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
headlamp cleaning
system*
1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and commercially available
premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios ( page 319).

313
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Engine oils Please follow Maintenance System Brake fluid


(U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles)
Engine oils are specifically tested for their recommendations for schedulded oil During vehicle operation, the boiling point
suitability in our engines and durability for changes. Failure to do so could result in of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
our service intervals. Therefore, only use engine damage not covered by the through the absorption of moisture from
approved engine oils and oil filters re- Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. the atmosphere. Under extremely strenu-
quired for vehicles with Maintenance Sys- ous operating conditions, this moisture
tem (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada Engine oil additives content can lead to the formation of bub-
vehicles). For a listing of approved engine bles in the system, thus reducing the
oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Ap- Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. systems efficiency.
proved Service Products pamphlet, or con- They may damage the engine.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Damage or malfunctions resulting from replaced every two years, preferably in the
Truck Center.
blending oil additives are not covered by spring.
Using engine oils and oil filters of specifica- the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Only brake fluid approved by
tion other than those expressly required
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your
for the Maintenance System Air conditioning refrigerant
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles), or
Center will provide you with additional in-
changing of oil and oil filter at change inter- R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
formation.
vals longer than those called for by the lubricating oil are used in the air condition-
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or ing system.
FSS (Canada vehicles) will result in engine Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lu-
damage not covered by the bricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. system will occur.

314
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Premium unleaded gasoline Fuel requirements Gasoline additives

! Only use premium unleaded fuel. A major concern among engine manufac-
turers is carbon build-up caused by gaso-
To maintain the engines durability and The octane number (posted at the
line. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
performance, premium unleaded gaso- pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
use of quality gasoline containing additives
line must be used. If premium unleaded of both the Research (R) octane num-
that prevent the build-up of carbon depos-
is not available and low octane fuel is ber and the Motor (M) octane number:
its.
used, follow these precautions: (R+M)/2). This is also known as the
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. After an extended period of using fuels
Have the fuel tank only partially
without such additives carbon deposits
filled with unleaded regular and fill Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
can build up, especially on the intake
up with premium unleaded as soon such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
valves and in the combustion area, leading
as possible. used provided the ratio of any one of these
to engine performance problems such as:
oxygenates to gasoline does not
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%. Warm-up hesitation
acceleration.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not Unstable idle
Do not exceed an engine speed of
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded Knocking/pinging
with a light load such as two Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
Misfire
persons and no luggage. not allowed. Gasohol, which contains
10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, Power loss
Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum
can be used.
accelerator pedal position if the
vehicle is fully loaded or operating These blends must also meet all other fuel
in mountainous terrain. requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.

315
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

In areas where carbon deposits may be Coolants The coolant solution must be used year
encountered due to lack of availability of round to provide the necessary corrosion
gasolines which contain these additives, The engine coolant is a mixture of water protection and increase boil-over protec-
Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of and anticorrosion / antifreeze, which tion. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for
additives approved by us for use on provides: replacement interval.
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to Factory Corrosion protection To provide important corrosion protection,
Approved Service Products Pamphlet for a
Freeze protection the solution must be at least 45%
listing of approved product(s). Follow
anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to
directions on product label. Boiling protection (by increasing the freeze protection to approx. - 22F
Do not blend other specific fuel additives boiling point) [-30C]). If you use a solution that is more
with fuel. This only results in unnecessary The cooling system was filled at the factory than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze
costs and may be harmful to the engine with a coolant providing freeze protection protection to approx. - 49F [-45C]), the
operation. to approximately -35F (-37C) and corro- engine temperature will increase due to
sion protection. the lower heat transfer capability of the so-
Damage or malfunction resulting from
lution. Therefore, do not use more than
poor fuel quality or from blending addition- If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
al fuel additives other than those tested -22F (-30C), the boiling point of the cool-
and approved by us for use on ant in the pressurized cooling system is
Mercedes-Benz vehicles listed in the Fac- reached at approximately 266F (130C).
tory Approved Service Products Pamphlet
are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.

316
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

If the coolant level is low, water and


MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze
should be used to bring it up to the proper
level (have cooling system checked for
signs of leakage). Please make sure the
mixture is in accordance with label instruc-
tions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality, con-
sult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.

317
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will Before the start of the winter season (or
aluminum parts. The use of aluminum result in a significantly shortened service once a year in hot southern regions), you
components in motor vehicle engines ne- life.) should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
cessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked. The coolant is also
Therefore, the following product is strongly
coolant used in such engines be regularly checked each time you bring your
recommended for use in your vehicle:
specifically formulated to protect the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz 325.0
aluminum parts. (Failure to use such Light Truck Center for service.
anticorrosion/antifreeze agent.

Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity

Model Approx. freeze protection


35F ( 37C) 49F ( 45C)
ML 350, ML 500, 6.4 US qt (6.0 l) 7.0 US qt (6.6 l)

318
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Windshield washer and headlamp Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
cleaning* system Washer Concentrate S and water (or mixing ratio
concentrate and commercially avail-
Both the windshield washer and headlamp able premixed windshield washer For temperatures above freezing point, use
cleaning* system are supplied from the solvent/antifreeze, depending on am- MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S
windshield washer fluid reservoir. bient temperatures). and water:
The windshield and headlamp washer fluid 1 part S to 100 parts water
reservoir has a capacity of approx. Warning! G (1.34 fl oz [40 ml] S to 1 gallon [4.0 l]
8.0 US qt (7.6 l).
water)
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flam-
mable. Do not spill washer For temperatures below freezing point, use
solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S
because it may ignite and burn. You could be and commercially available premixed
seriously burned. windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
1 part S to 100 parts solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml]S to 1 gallon [4.0 l]
solvent)

319
Technical data
Consumer information

The following text is published as required Treadwear Traction


of all manufacturers of passenger cars un-
The treadwear grade is a comparative The traction grades, from highest to lowest
der Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regula-
rating based on the wear rate of the tire are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-
tions, Part 575 pursuant to the National
when tested under controlled conditions sent the tires ability to stop on wet pave-
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
on a specified government test course. For ment as measured under controlled
1966.
example, a tire graded 150 would wear conditions on specified government test
one and one-half (11/2) times as well on surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
Uniform tire quality grading
the government course as a tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
graded 100. The relative performance of mance.
Quality grades can be found, where appli-
tires depends upon the actual conditions
cable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to varia-
Warning! G
example:
tions in driving habits, service practices The traction grade assigned to this tire is
Treadwear Traction Temperature and differences in road characteristics and based on straight ahead braking traction
climate. tests, and does not include acceleration,
200 AA A
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.

320
Technical data
Consumer information

Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the high-
Warning! G
est), B, and C, representing the tires resis- The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
tance to the generation of heat and its lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
ability to dissipate heat when tested under not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin-
controlled conditions on a specified indoor flation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem- rately or in combination, can cause
perature can cause the material of the tire excessive heat build-up and possible tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex- failure.
cessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-
tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.

321
322
Technical terms

ABS BAS CAN system


(Antilock Brake System) (Brake Assist System) (Controller Area Network)
Prevents the wheels from locking up System for potentially reducing braking Data bus network serving to control
during braking so that the vehicle can distances in emergency braking situa- vehicle functions such as door locking
continue to be steered. tions. The system is activated when it or windshield wiping.
senses an emergency based on how
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation Cockpit
fast the brake is applied.
system All instruments, switches, buttons and
This system detects if a special system Bi-Xenon headlamps* indicator/warning lamps in the
compatible child restraint seat is in- Headlamps which use an electric arc as passenger compartment needed for
stalled on the front passenger seat. The the light source and produce a more vehicle operation and monitoring.
system will automatically deactivate intense light than filament headlamps.
Cruise control
the passenger front airbag when such a Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low
Driving convenience system for
seat is properly installed (indicator beam and high beam.
automatically maintaining the vehicle
lamp 7 in the instrument cluster
CAC speed set by the driver.
lights up). See an authorized
(Customer Assistance Center) Engine number
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for
Mercedes-Benz customer service The number set by the manufacturer
availability.
center, which can help you with any and placed on the cylinder block to
BabySmartTM compatible child seats questions about your vehicle and uniquely identify each engine
Special restraint system for children. provide assistance in the event of a produced.
The sensor system for the passenger breakdown.
seat prevents deployment of the pas-
senger front airbag if a BabySmartTM
compatible child seat is installed.

323
Technical terms

Engine oil viscosity FSS (Canada vehicles) GVW


Measurement for the inner friction (vis- (Flexible Service System) (Gross Vehicle Weight)
cosity) of the oil at different tempera- Maintenance service indicator in the The GVW comprises the weight of the
tures. The higher the temperature an speedometer display that informs the vehicle including fuel, tools, spare
oil can tolerate without becoming thin, driver when the next vehicle mainte- wheel, installed accessories, passen-
or the lower the temperature it can tol- nance service is due. FSS evaluates en- gers and cargo. The GVW must never
erate without becoming viscous, the gine temperature, oil level, vehicle exceed the GVWR, indicated on the
better the viscosity. speed, engine speed, distance driven certification label located on the driv-
and the time elapsed since your last ers door pillar.
ESP
service, and calls for the next mainte-
(Electronic Stability Program) GVWR
nance service accordingly.
Improves vehicle handling and direc- (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
tional stability. GAWR This is the maximum permissible vehi-
(Gross Axle Weight Rating) cle weight. It is indicated on certifica-
ETD
The GAWR is the maximum permissible tion label located on the drivers door
(Emergency Tensioning Device)
axle weight. The gross vehicle weight pillar.
Device which deploys in certain frontal
on each axle must never exceed the
and rear collisions exceeding the sys- Gear range
GAWR for the front and rear axle indi-
tem's threshold to tighten the seat Number of gears which are available to
cated on the certification label located
belts. the automatic transmission for shifting.
on the drivers door pillar.
->SRS The automatic gear shifting process
can be adapted to specific operating
conditions using the gear selector
lever.

324
Technical terms

GPS Line of fall Memory function*


(Global Positioning System) The direct line that an object moves Used to store three individual seat,
Satellite-based system for relaying downhill when influenced by the force steering wheel and mirror positions.
geographic location information to and of gravity alone.
MON
from vehicles equipped with special re-
Lock button (Motor Octane Number)
ceivers. Employs CD or DVD digital
Button on the door which indicates The Motor Octane Number for gasoline
maps for navigation.
whether the door is locked or un- as determined by a standardized meth-
Instrument cluster locked. Pushing the lock button down od. It is an indication of a gasoline's
The displays and indicator/warning on an individual door from inside will ability to resist undesired detonation
lamps in the drivers field of vision, in- lock that door. (knocking). The average of both the
cluding the tachometer, speedometer, MON (Motor Octane Number) and
MCS
engine temperature and fuel gauge. ->RON (Research Octane Number) is
(Modular Control System)
posted at the pump, also known as
Kickdown Information and operating center for
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Depressing the accelerator past the vehicle sound and communications
point of resistance shifts the transmis- systems, including the radio and the ra- Multifunction display
sion down to the lowest possible gear. dio and navigation system, as well as A display field in the instrument cluster
This very quickly accelerates the vehi- for other optional equipment (CD used to present information provided
cle and should not be used for normal changer, telephone, etc.). by the control system.
acceleration needs.

325
Technical terms

Parktronic (Parking assist)* Remote Vehicle Diagnostics RON


System which uses visual and acoustic Transmission of vehicle data and cur- (Research Octane Number)
signals to assist the driver during park- rent location to the Mercedes-Benz The Research Octane Number for gaso-
ing maneuvers. Customer Assistance Center for sub- line as determined by a standardized
scribers to Tele Aid service. method. It is an indication of a gaso-
Poly-V-belt drive
line's ability to resist undesired detona-
Drives engine-components (alternator, REST
tion (knocking). The average of both
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine. (Residual engine heat utilization)
the ->MON (Motor Octane Number)
Feature that uses the engine heat
Power train and RON (Research Octane Number) is
stored in the coolant to heat the vehi-
Collective term designating all compo- posted at the pump, also known as
cle interior for a short time after the en-
nents used to generate and transmit ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
gine has been turned off.
motive power to the drive axles, includ-
Shift lock
ing Restraint system
When the vehicle is parked, this lock
engine Seat belts, belt tensioner, airbags and
prevents the transmission selector le-
child seat restraint systems. As inde-
clutch/torque converter ver from being moved out of position P
pendent systems, their protective func-
without key turned and brake pedal de-
transmission tions complement one another.
pressed.
transfer case SRS
drive shaft (Supplemental Restraint System)
Seat belts, emergency tensioning de-
differential
vice and airbags. Though independent
axle shafts/axles systems, they are closely interfaced to
provide effective occupant protection.

326
Technical terms

Tele Aid System* Tire speed rating TWR


(Telematic Alarm Identification on Part of tire designation; indicates the (Tongue Weight Rating)
Demand) speed range for which a tire is ap- The TWR is the maximum permissible
The Tele Aid system consists of three proved. weight on the trailer tongue.
types of response: automatic and man-
Traction Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles)
ual emergency, roadside assistance
Force exerted by the vehicle on the Maintenance service indicator in the
and information. Tele Aid is initially ac-
road via the tires. speedometer display that informs the
tivated by completing a subscriber
driver when the next vehicle mainte-
agreement and placing an acquain- Transfer case
nance service is due. The Maintenance
tance call. Speed of rotation/torque converter
System tracks distance driven and the
The Tele Aid system is operational pro- that works together with the ->auto-
time elapsed since your last mainte-
vided that the vehicles battery is matic transmission. In the LOW mode
nance service, and calls for the next
charged, properly connected, not dam- off-road position, the transfer case de-
maintenance service accordingly.
aged and cellular and GPS coverage is creases the output rotational speed of
available. the ->automatic transmission by ap- VIN
proximately half. This results in a corre- (Vehicle Identification Number)
Telematics*
sponding increase of torque on the The number set by the manufacturer
A combination of the terms telecom-
drive axles. and placed on the body to uniquely
munications and informatics.
The vehicle then has nearly double the identify each vehicle produced.
Tightening torque driving force but drives only approxi- Voice control system*
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug mately half as fast. Voice control system for car phones,
wrench) with which threaded fasteners portable cell phones and audio sys-
such as wheel bolts are tightened. tems (radio, CD, etc.).

327
328
Index

A Rear passenger compartment Headlamp aim 282


ABS 25, 76, 323 ventilation and climate control 143 Instrument cluster illumination 117
ABS control 76 Rear window defroster 135 Interior rear view mirror 41
LOW RANGE mode 77 Rear window wiper 52 Manual seat 36
Malfunction indicator lamp 248 Residual heat 142 Mirrors 41
Warning lamp 248 Seat heater* 98 Seat cushion tilt 39
Accelerator position, Tow-away alarm 85 Seat fore and aft 36
automatic transmission 124 Warning indicators (Parktronic*) 158 Seat fore and aft adjustment 38
Accident Windshield wipers 51 Seat height 37, 39
In case of 53 Activating automatic central locking 94 Seats 35
Activating Adding Steering wheel 40
Air circulation mode 141 Coolant 228 Adjusting air distribution
Air recirculation mode 141 Engine oil 226 Automatic climate control 139
Anti-theft alarm system 83 Additional turn signals 274 Adjusting air volume
Automatic climate control 137 Adjustable steering column Automatic climate control 139
ESP 82 Indicator lamp 260 Air conditioning
Exterior headlamps 50 Adjusting 35 Cooling 141
Hazard warning flasher 113 Backrest tilt 37, 39 Air conditioning refrigerant 314
Headlamps 50 Exterior rear view mirror 41 Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure
Ignition 33 Head restraint height 37, 39
Immobilizer 55, 83 Head restraint tilt 38, 40

329
Index

Air recirculation mode 140 Anticorrosion/antifreeze 318 Attaching a trailer 213


Activating 141 Antiglare Automatic antiglare for
Deactivating 141 Automatic 128 rear view mirror 128
Air vents Antilock brake system (ABS) 323 Automatic central locking
Automatic climate control 144 Anti-theft alarm system Activating 94
AIRBAG OFF Arming 83 Deactivating 94
Warning lamp 249 Canceling alarm 84, 86 Automatic climate control 136
Airbags 59 Disarming 84 Adjusting air distribution 139
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation Anti-theft systems Adjusting air volume 139
system 323 Anti-theft alarm system 83 Air conditioning 141
BabySmartTM deactivation Immobilizer 83 Air vents 144
system 70 Tow-away alarm, Basic setting 139
Children 60 glass breakage sensor 84 Changing basic setting 139
Front 63 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning Defrosting 140
Passenger 63 Armrest Economy mode 137
Safety guidelines 62 Storage compartment in front of 168 Rear passenger compartment 143
Side impact 64 Storage compartments 168 Rear window defroster 135
Window curtain 64 Armrest in rear seat bench 170 Residual heat utilization 142
Alarm Ashtray Residual ventilation 142
Audible 75, 84, 86 Front center console 171 Switching off 139
Canceling 84, 86 ATF (automatic transmission fluid) 227 Switching on 139
Visual 83
Alarm system
Anti-theft 83

330
Index

Automatic headlamp mode 108 Backrest tilt 36 Brake pad wear


Automatic interior lighting control Backup lamps 275, 279 Indicator lamp 261
Activating 114 Bulbs 275 Brakes 198
Deactivating 114 BAS 78, 323 Warning lamp 250
Automatic locking when driving 93 Malfunction indicator lamp 251, 252, Break-in period 196
Automatic transmission 253 Bulbs, replacing 274
Accelerator position 124 Warning lamp 251 Additional turn signals 274
Emergency operation Batteries, remote control Backup lamps 275
(Limp Home Mode) 126 Replacing 273 Brake lamps 275
Gear ranges 122 Battery discharged Fog lamps 274
Gear selector lever position 123 Jump starting 291 Front fog lamp 279
Gear shifting malfunctions 126 Battery indicator lamp Front lamps 274
Kickdown 124 Indicator lamp 261 High beam 274
Manual shifting 121 Battery, vehicle 228, 272 High mounted brake lamp 281
One-touch gearshifting 121 Charging 289 License plate lamps 275, 281
Selector lever position 120 Disconnecting 289 Low beam 274
Towing a trailer 125 Reconnecting 289 Parking, standing lamp 274
Transmission fluid 227 Reinstalling 289 Rear fog lamps 279
Removing 289 Rear side marker lamp bulbs 279
B
Bi-Xenon headlamps* 323 Side marker lamps 274, 275
BabySmartTM
Block heater (Canada only) 236 Standing lamps 274
Airbag deactivation system 70
Blocking Tail lamp assemblies 279
Compatible child seats 70, 323
Rear door window operation 74 Turn signal lamps 274, 275
Self-test 70
Brake assist system (BAS) 323 Turn signal, side marker lamp 274
BabySmartTM airbag
Brake fluid 314
deactivation system 323
Brake lamp bulbs 275

331
Index

C Cargo tie-down rings 161 Checking


CAC (Customer Assistance Center) 323 Catalytic converter 217 Coolant level 227
Calibrating compass 191 CD-changer* 265 Oil level 223
California Center console 27 Tire inflate pressure 221
Important notice 11 Lower part 28 Vehicle lighting 221
Calling up Upper part 27 Checking weights
Service indicator 238 Central locking Trailer and vehicle 213
CAN system 323 Automatic 93 Checklist
Capacities From inside 94 Off-road driving 205
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 312 Switch 94 Returning from off-road driving 210
Cargo area see Cargo compartment Unlocking from inside 94 Child safety 67
Cargo compartment Central locking switch 94 Airbags 60
Liftgate 89 Certification label 304 Infant and child
Lighting 116 Charge indicator lamp 261 restraint systems 64, 68
Tie-down rings 161 Charging LATCH child seat mounts 73
Cargo compartment cover blind* 164 Vehicle battery 289 Child safety switch see Blocking of rear
Closing 164 Chart door window operation
Installing 165 Fuses 298 Cigarette lighter
Opening 164 CHECK ENGINE malfunction Front center console 171
Removing 164 indicator lamp 254, 255
Cargo floor plates 165
Installing 166
Removing 165
Storing 165

332
Index

Cleaning Closing tilt/sliding sunroof* Coolant level


Cup holder 244 In an emergency 271 Checking 227
Gear selector lever 244 Cockpit 22, 323 Crossing obstacles 209
Hard plastic trim items 244 Combination switch Cruise control 153, 323
Headlamps 133 High beam flasher 50 Canceling 154
Headliner 244 Turn signals 50 Driving downhill 154
Instrument cluster 244 Windshield wipers 51 Driving uphill 154
Leather upholstery 245 Compass 190 Fine adjustment 155
Light alloy wheels 244 Calibrating 191 LOW RANGE mode 155
MB Tex upholstery 245 Setting compass zone 191 Saving current speed 154
Plastic and rubber parts 245 Compass zone 191 Setting speeds 155
Seat belts 244 Consumer information 320 Cruise control lever 153
Steering wheel 244 Control and operation of radio Cup holder 169
Windows 243 transmitters 216 Cleaning 244
Windshield 51 Coolant 227, 316 In front seat armrest 170
Wiper blades 243 Adding 228 In instrument panel 169
Clock 26, 119 Anticorrosion/antifreeze In rear center console 170
Closing quantity 316 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) 323
Glove box 167 Checking level 227
Hood 223 Indicator lamp 256
Liftgate 92 Temperature 218
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* 271 Temperature gauge 118
Rear quarter windows* 149
Side windows 147
Tilt/sliding sunroof* 150

333
Index

D Deactivating automatic central Displays


Daytime running lamp mode 109 locking 94 Messages 224
Deactivating Deep water see Standing water Service indicator 237
Air conditioning (cooling) 141 Defogging Distance remaining 192
Air recirculation mode 141 Windshield 140 Door unlock
Alarm 84 Defrosting 140 With Tele Aid* 182
Anti-theft alarm system 84 Difficulties Doors
Automatic climate control 137, 139 While driving see Problems Opening from inside vehicle 90
Cruise control 154 while driving Opening from outside 89
Defrost 140 With starting 48 Downhill driving
Engine 55 Direction of rotation (tires) 232 Cruise control 154
ESP 81 Discharged battery Downshifting 121
Hazard warning flasher 113 Jump starting 291 Drink holder see Cup holder
Headlamps 55 Disconnecting Drinking and driving 197
Immobilizer 83 Vehicle battery 289 Drive sensibly-save fuel 197
Rear passenger compartment Display in the speedometer 118 Driving 43, 48
ventilation and climate control 143 Display messages Abroad 216
Rear window defroster 135 Error 263 In winter 202
Rear window wiper 52 Service indicator (FSS) 263 Problems 53
Residual heat 142 StArt 263 Safety systems 76
Seat heater* 99 Through standing water 204
Tow-away alarm 85
Tow-away alarm
(vehicles with trip computer*) 85
Tow-away alarm (vehicles without trip
computer*) 86

334
Index

Driving abroad 216 Economy mode Emergency operations


Driving instructions Automatic climate control 137 Closing tilt/sliding sunroof* 271
Towing a trailer 214 Electrical connections Locking the vehicle 269
Driving off 199 Trailer 212 Opening tilt/sliding sunroof* 271
Driving safety systems Electrical fuses 297 Remote door unlock 182
4-ETS 79 Electrical outlet 173 Unlocking the vehicle 268
ABS 76 Electrical system Emergency tensioning device see ETD
BAS 78 Technical data 309 Emission control 217
ESP 80 Electrically folding exterior Emission control label 304
Driving systems 153 rear view mirrors 130 Engine
Cruise control 153 Electronic Brake Proportioning see EBP Starting 47
Driving safety systems 76 Electronic Stability Program see ESP Technical data 306
EBP 80 Electronic stability program see ESP Turning off 55
Parktronic* 156 Electronic Traction System see 4-ETS Engine cleaning 242
Driving through water 208 Emergency call system Engine compartment
Driving tips 124 Requirements 175 Hood 222
Accelerator position 124 Emergency call system* 175 Main fuse box 298
Kickdown 124 Emergency calls Engine malfunction indicator lamp 254
Initiating an emergency call 178 Engine malfunction indicator lamp
E
With Tele Aid* 176 (Canada only) 25
Easy entry/exit feature* 101
Emergency operation Engine malfunction indicator lamp
EBP 80
(Limp Home Mode) 126 (USA only) 25
Indicator lamp 251
Engine number 323

335
Index

Engine oil 223, 314 Exterior mirrors Folding electrically


Adding 226 Folding 130 Exterior rear view mirrors 130
Additives 314 Exterior rear view mirrors 4-ETS 25, 79
Checking level 223 Adjusting 41 Indicator lamp 259
Consumption 223 Folding electrically 130 LOW RANGE mode 80
Messages in display 224 Malfunction indicator lamp 259
F
Oil dipstick 226 Warning lamp 258
Fastening the seat belts 43
Viscosity 324 Front airbags 63
Fine adjustment
Enlarged cargo compartment 100 Front fog lamps
Cruise control 155
Error Indicator lamp 260
First aid kit 264
Display messages 263 Front lamps
Flat tire 284
ESP 25, 80, 324 Replacing bulbs 274, 276
Lowering the vehicle 287
Indicator lamp 251 Front towing eye 295
Preparing the vehicle 284
LOW RANGE mode 81 Front turn signal bulbs
Spare wheel 266
Malfunction indicator lamp 251, 252, Replacing 278
Flexible Service System (FSS) 237, 324
253 FSS (Flexible Service System) 237, 324
Fluid level
Switching off 81 Fuel 220
Automatic transmission 227
Switching on 82 Additives 315
Fog lamps 111
Synchronizing 252 Fuel reserve warning lamp 259
Replacing bulbs 274
Warning lamp 258 Gasoline additives 315
Fog lamps, front
ETD 324 Premium unleaded gasoline 220,
Replacing bulbs 276
Safety guidelines 62 315
Switching on 112
ETD (Emergency tensioning device) 67 Requirements 315
Folding
Reserve warning 25
Exterior mirrors 130

336
Index

Fuel additives 315 G Glove box 23, 167


Fuel filler flap 219 Garage door opener 29, 183 Closing 167
Locking 219 Erasing in remote control 188 Opening 167
Opening 269 Gasoline additives 315 Good visibility 128
Unlocking 219 Gasoline see Fuel GPS 325
Fuel requirements 315 Gauge for GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) 324
Fuel tank Coolant temperature 25 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Filler flap 219 Fuel 25 Rating) 324
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 312 Outside temperature 25
H
Functions GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) 324
Hard plastic trim items
Trip computer* 189 Gear range 324
Cleaning 244
Fuse box 299 Automatic transmission 122
Hazard warning flasher 113
Fuse chart 298 Limiting 122
Switching off 113
Fuse extractor 298 Shifting into optimal 121
Switching on 113
Fuses 297 Gear range limit
Head restraints
Fuse box in passenger footwell 299 Canceling 121
Manual seats 37
Fuse chart 298 Gear selector lever
Power seats* 39
Fuse extractor 298 Cleaning 244
Headlamp aim
Main fuse box 298 Position 123
Adjusting 282
Spare fuses 298 Glass breakage sensor 84
Global Positioning System (GPS) 325

337
Index

Headlamp cleaning system* 230 Hood 222 Information


Headlamps Closing 223 About service and warranty 10
Automatic control 108 Opening 222 Button for Tele Aid* 180
Bi-Xenon* 323 Hooks Inside rear view mirror
Cleaning 242 Loading 162 Antiglare 128
Cleaning system* 133, 230 Hydroplaning 201 Installing
Refilling washer fluid 230 Infant and child restraint systems 71
I
Switching off 55 Wiper blades 283
Identification labels 304
Switching on 50 Instrument cluster 24, 117, 325
Certification label 304
Washer fluid 319 Cleaning 244
Vehicle identification number
Washer system 319 Coolant temperature gauge 118
(VIN) 304
Headliner Display in the speedometer 118
Ignition 33
Cleaning 244 Illumination 117
Immobilizer 83
Heated seats* 98 Lamps in 259
Activating 83
Height adjustment Outside temperature indicator 119
Deactivating 83
Head restraints 37, 39 Instruments and controls see Cockpit
Indicator lamp
Seat belts 46 Integrated remote control
Adjustable steering column 260
Steering wheel 40 Erasing memory 188
Brake pad wear 261
High beam 111 Operating 188
Coolant 256
High beam flasher 50, 111 Interior lighting 114
Front fog lamps 260
High beam halogen headlamps Activating automatic control 114
Low engine oil level 260
Replacing bulbs 277 Deactivating automatic control 114
Infant and child restraint systems 68
High beam headlamps Manual control 115
Installing 71
Replacing bulbs 274 Reading lamps 115
LATCH child seat mounts 73
High mounted brake lamp Interior rear view mirror
Replacing bulbs 281 Adjusting 41

338
Index

Intermittent wiping 132 Lamps, indicator and warning LATCH child seat anchors 73
4-ETS 258, 259 LATCH child seat mounts 73
J
ABS 248 Layout of poly-V-belt drive 305
Jack 265
Adjustable steering column 260 Leather upholstery
Jump starting 291
AIRBAG OFF 63, 249 Cleaning 245
K BAS 78, 251, 252 Lever
Key Battery indicator lamp 261 For cruise control 153
Global locking 89 Brake pad wear 261 License plate lamps
Global unlocking 89 Brakes 250 Replacing bulbs 275, 281
Loss of 90 CHECK ENGINE 254, 255 Liftgate
Positions in steering lock 33 CHECK Engine malfunction indicator Closing 92
Remote control with folding key 88 lamp 255 Opening 89, 91
Unlocking liftgate 89 Coolant 256 Opening from inside 91
Unlocking the drivers door, EBP 251 Opening from outside 91
fuel filler flap 89 Engine diagnostics 254, 255 Light alloy wheels
Key, Mechanical 268 ESP 251, 252, 258 Cleaning 244
Key, Remote control Front fog lamps 260 Lighter see cigarette lighter
Unlocking with 32 Fuel reserve 259
Kickdown 124, 325 Low engine oil level 260
LOW RANGE 259
L
Low washer system fluid level 260
Labels, identification 304
Seat belts 260
Lamp bulbs, exterior 274
Service indicator 237
Lamps, exterior
SRS 262
Front 274
Turn signals 25
Rear 275

339
Index

Lighting 107 Locator lighting 111 Lowering


Automatic headlamp mode 108 Lock button 325 Vehicle 287
Cargo compartment 116 Locking 88
M
Daytime running lamp mode 109 Automatic while driving 93
Main dimensions 310
Fog lamps 111 Centrally from inside 94
Main fuse box 298
Front fog lamps 112 Fuel filler flap 219
Maintenance 12
High beam 111 Global 89
Display messages 263
High beam flasher 111 Vehicle in an emergency 269
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) 327
Instrument cluster illumination 117 Locking knobs 32
Manual operations
Interior 114 Loss of keys 90
Fuel filler flap 269
Locator lighting 111 Loss of Service and Warranty Information
Interior lighting control 115
Night security illumination 109 Booklet 303
Locking the vehicle 269
Limiting the gear range 122 Low beam bulbs
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* 271
Limp Home Mode 126 Replacing bulbs 276
Unlocking the drivers door 268
Line of fall 325 Low beam headlamps
Unlocking transmission selector
Loading 160 Replacing bulbs 274
lever 270
Cargo compartment cover Switching on 50
Manual seat
blind* 164 Low engine oil level
Adjusting 36
Cargo floor plates 165 Indicator lamp 260
Adjusting backrest tilt 37
Cargo tie-down rings 161 LOW RANGE - 4-ETS 80
Adjusting head restraint height 37
Hooks 162 LOW RANGE - ABS 77
Adjusting head restraint tilt 38, 40
Instructions 160 LOW RANGE - ESP 81
Seat fore and aft adjustment 36
Partition net* 162 LOW RANGE mode 127
Seat height 37
Roof rack 166 Low washer system fluid level
MB Tex upholstery
Split rear bench seat 100 Indicator lamp 260
Cleaning 245
Trailer 212

340
Index

MCS O One-touch gearshifting 121


Modular Control System 325 Occupant safety 58 Canceling gear range limit 121
Mechanical key 268 Children and airbags 60 Downshifting 121
Memory function 105, 325 Children in the vehicle 67 Upshifting 121
Memory function* 106 Fastening the seat belt 43 Opening
Recalling positions from Infant and child restraint systems 68 Doors from the inside 90
memory 106 LATCH child seat mounts 73 Fuel filler flap 219
Mirrors Seat belts 43, 62 Fuel filler flap manually 269
Activating exterior mirror parking Odometer display 118 Glove box 167
position 129 Odometer, main 25 Hood 222
Adjusting 41 Off-road driving Liftgate 89, 91
Automatic antiglare for rear view Checklist 205, 210 Liftgate from inside 91
mirror 128 Crossing obstacles 209 Liftgate from outside 91
Exterior rear view mirror 41 Driving instructions off-road Power tilt/sliding sunroof* 271
Storing exterior rear view mirror driving 204 Rear quarter windows* 148
parking position 106 Driving through water 208 Side windows 147
MON 220 Returning 210 Storage compartment in front of
MON (Motor Octane Number) 325 Rules 205 armrest 169
Multifunction display 325 Special driving features 205 Storage compartment under passenger
Steep terrain 206 seat 168
N
Oil Tilt/sliding sunroof* 150
Night security illumination 109
Adding 226 Tilt/Sliding sunroof* in an
Deactivation temporarily 110
Consumption 223 emergency 271
Dipstick 223 Windows 147
Oil dipstick 226
Viscosity 324

341
Index

Opening and closing Parking, standing lamp Plastic and rubber parts
Side windows 146 Replacing bulbs 274 Cleaning 245
Operating Parktronic (Parking assist)* 326 Poly-V-belt drive 326
Garage door opener 188 Parktronic system* Layout 305
Integrated remote control 188 Switching off 159 Positions (Memory function*)
Radio transmitters 216 Switching on 159 Recalling from memory 106
Vehicle outside the USA or Parktronic* 156 Storing into memory 106
Canada 13 Cleaning system sensor 243 Power assistance 197
Operating safety 17 Range of the sensors 157 Power seat*
Operators Manual 10 Sensor cover 243 Adjusting backrest tilt 39
Ornamental moldings 242 Switching off 159 Adjusting head restraint height 39
Outside temperature indicator 119 Switching on 159 Adjusting seat cushion tilt 39
Overdue service 238 Warning indicators 158 Adjusting seat height 39
Overhead control panel 29 Partition net* 162 Seat fore and aft adjustment 38
Engaging 162 Power tilt/sliding sunroof* 150
P
Removing 164 Closing 271
Paintwork 241
Tightening 163 Opening 271
Panic alarm 75
Parts see Parts service Power train 326
Panic button on remote control 75
Parts service 302 Power washer 241
Parking 200
Passenger compartment 215 Power windows
Parking and locking 54
Interior lighting 114 Blocking of rear door window
Parking brake 48, 54
Passenger footwell operation 74
Engaging 54
Fuse box in 299 Side windows 146
Releasing 48
Passenger safety see Occupant safety Synchronizing 148
Parking lamps
Pedals 197
Switching on 107

342
Index

Practical hints Reading lamp 29 Rear seats 99


First aid kit 264 Reading lamps 115 Easy entry/exit feature* 101
Fuses 297 Rear automatic climate control 143 Enlarging cargo compartment 100
Lamps in instrument cluster 248 Adjusting air volume and air Folding down backrest 100
Spare wheel 266 distribution manually 143 Folding up 101
Towing the vehicle 293 Automatic mode 143 Folding up backrest 100
Vehicle jack 265 Rear bench seat Fore and aft 100
Vehicle tool kit 264 Foldable 100 Lowering 101
Premium unleaded gasoline 315 Rear door window Third row* 102
Problems Blocking operation 74 Rear towing eye 295
While driving 53 Rear fog lamp Rear view mirror automatic antiglare 128
With vehicle 18 Switching on 112 Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
Product information 9 Rear lamp bulbs Rear window defroster 135
Replacing 279 Activating 135
R
Rear passenger compartment ventilation Deactivating 135
Radio transmitters, control and
and climate control Rear window wiper 133
operation 216
Activating 143 Rain sensor* 133
Rain sensor* 132, 133
Deactivating 143 Rear window wiper/washer 52
Range of the sensors
Rear passenger compartment ventilation Reconnecting
Parktronic* 157
and rear automatic climate Vehicle battery 289
Rapid seat heating
control 143 Refrigerant
Switching off 99
Rear quarter windows* 148 Air conditioning 314
Rapid seat heating*
Closing 149 Regular checks 221
Switching on 99
Opening 148 Reinstalling vehicle battery 289

343
Index

Remote control Replacing REST (Residual engine heat


Global locking 89 Backup lamp bulbs 279 utilization) 326
Global unlocking 89 Brake lamp bulbs 279 Restraint system 326
Replacing batteries 273 Bulbs 274 Restraint system see Infant and child
Synchronizing 273 Front lamp bulbs 276 restraint systems
Unlocking liftgate 89 Front turn signal bulbs 278 Returning from off-road driving 210
Unlocking the drivers door, Fuses 298 Rims 307
fuel filler flap 89 High beam halogen bulbs 277 Roadside assistance 12
Unlocking with 32 High mounted brake lamp 281 Tele Aid* 178
Remote control with folding key 88 License plate lamp bulbs 281 RON 220
Remote door unlock Low beam bulbs 276 RON (Research Octane Number) 326
With Tele Aid* 182 Rear fog lamp bulbs 279 Roof rack 166
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics 326 Rear lamp bulbs 275, 279 Rotating wheels 233
Removing Rear side marker lamp bulbs 279 Rubber parts
Vehicle battery 289 Rear turn signal bulbs 279 Cleaning 245
Wheel 286 Side marker bulb 278
S
Wiper blades 283 Wiper blades 283
Safety
Removing spare wheel 266 Replacing front fog lamp bulb 279
Occupant 58
Reporting
Safety belts see Seat belts
Safety defects 19
Safety defects
Resetting
Reporting 19
Service indicator (FSS) 238
Safety systems
Trip odometer 119
Driving 76
Residual heat utilization 142, 326
Residual ventilation 142

344
Index

Saving current speed 154 Selector lever 26 Service life (tires) 232
Seat belt force limiter 67 Lock 47 Service System see FSS
Seat belt height adjustment 46 Position 26, 120 Setting
Seat belts 64 Self-test Cruise control 154
Cleaning 244 BabySmartTM airbag deactivation Higher speed in cruise control 155
Fastening 43 system 70 Hours (clock) 119
Height adjustment 46 Tele Aid* 175 Lower speed in cruise control 155
Proper use of 45, 66 Service Minutes (clock) 119
Safety guidelines 62 Calling up the service indicator 238 Slower speed in cruise control 155
Warning lamp 260 Major service (Service B) 237 Speed in cruise control 155
Seat heater* Minor service (Service A) 237 Setting date
Switching off 99 Overdue 238 Trip computer* 189
Switching on 98 Parts 302 Setting illumination time 110
Seats 95 Types 238 Setting language
Adjusting 35 When due 237 Trip computer* 193
Heater* 98 Service and Warranty Booklet Shift lock 326
Manual 36 Loss of 303 Shifting
Rapid seat heating* 99 Service and warranty information 10 Gear selector lever positions 123
Rear 99 Service indicator 237 Into optimal gear range (automatic
Split rear bench seat 100 Calling up 238 transmission) 121
Securing cargo Clearing 237, 238 Side impact airbags 64
Cargo tie-down rings 161 Service indicator (FSS) Side marker bulb
Display messages 263 Replacing 278
Side marker lamps
Replacing bulbs 274, 275

345
Index

Side windows 146 Speed settings Steering wheel


Automatic closing 147 Cruise control 155 Adjusting 40
Automatic opening 147 Speedometer 25 Adjustment 40
Cleaning 243 Split rear bench seat 100 Cleaning 244
Closing 147 SRS 66, 326 Stolen vehicle
Closing fully (Express-close) 147 Indicator lamp 262 Tracking services 183
Opening 147 Standing lamps 107 Stop watch 192
Opening and closing 146 Standing water Stopping
Opening fully (Express-open) 147 Driving instructions 204 Windows 147
Rear quarter window* 148 StArt Storage compartments 167
Stopping 147 Display messages 263 Armrest 168
Synchronizing power windows 148 Starting difficulties 48 Cup holder 170
Simultaneous wiping and washing Starting position 33 Glove box 167
Rear window wiper/washer 52 Starting the engine 47 Storage compartment in front of
Windshield wipers 51 Steep terrain armrest 168
Single wipe 51 Driving 206 Storage compartment under front
Snow chains 236 Steering column passenger seat* 167
Spare fuses 298 Height adjustment 40 Under front passenger seat* 167
Spare wheel 266 Length adjustment 40 Storing (Memory function*)
Removing 266 Steering lock 23, 33 Positions into memory 106
Speed Positions 33 Stranded vehicle 296
Saving current 154 Sun visor 134
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) 326

346
Index

Switching off T Tele Aid* 174


Automatic climate control 139 Tachometer 26, 119 Emergency calls 176
ESP 81 Displaying gear range 122 Information 180
Hazard warning flasher 113 Tail lamps 279 Initiating an emergency call
Headlamps 55 Cleaning 242 manually 178
Rapid seat heating 99 Tar stains 241 Remote door unlock 182
Transmission control LOW RANGE Technical data 314 Roadside assistance 178
mode 127 Brake fluid 314 Stolen vehicle tracking services 183
Switching on Coolants 316 System self-check 175
Automatic climate control 139 Electrical system 309 Tele Aid System* 175
ESP 82 Engine 306 Upgrade signals 181
Front fog lamps 112 Engine oil 314 Telematics* 327
Front fog lamps, rear fog lamp 112 Engine oil additives 314 Telephone* 173
Hazard warning flasher 113 Fuel requirements 315 Temperature
Headlamps 50 Gasoline additives 315 Grades of tires 321
Rapid seat heating* 99 Main dimensions 310 Tires 233
Seat heating* 98 Premium unleaded gasoline 315 Third row seats* 102
Transmission control LOW RANGE Rims and tires 307 Folding down single seat 103
mode 127 Weights 311 Installing single seat 104
Trip computer* 189 Windshield washer and headlamp Removing single seat 104
Windshield wipers 51 cleaning* system 319 Storing single seat 103
Synchronizing Tele Aid System* 327 Tie-down rings
ESP 252 (Cargo compartment) 161
Power windows 148
Remote control 273
Tilt/sliding sunroof* 152

347
Index

Tightening torque 327 Tools 264 Trailer hitches 211


Tightening torque (Wheel bolts) 287 Vehicle jack 265 Trailer towing 211
Tilt Vehicles with CD-changer* 265 Attaching a trailer 213
Head restraint 38, 40 Wheel bolt wrench 265 Checking weights 213
Tilt/sliding sunroof* Tow-away alarm 29, 84 Electrical connections 212
Closing 150 Arming 84 Hitches 211
Opening 150 Disarming 84 Loading 212
Synchronizing 152 Disarming for transport 84 Weights and ratings 212
Time Towing Trailer weights and ratings 212
Setting hours 119 Trailer 211 Transfer case 327
Setting minutes 119 Towing a trailer 214 Transmission control LOW RANGE
Tire inflation pressure Automatic transmission 125 mode 127
Checking 221, 232 Towing eye Switching off 127
Tire speed rating 202, 327 Front 295 Switching on 127
Tire traction 201 Rear 295 Transmission selector lever 270
Tires 307 Towing the vehicle 293 Unlocking manually 270
Direction of rotation 232 Stranded vehicle 296 Tread depth (tires) 235
Driving instructions 200 Tracking services Treadwear 320
Retreads 231 For stolen vehicle 183
Rims and tires 307 Traction 320, 327
Service life 232 Trailer
Temperature 233 Attaching 213
Temperature grades 321 Loading 212
Tread depth 235 Towing 214
Wear pattern 233
Winter 235

348
Index

Trip computer* 29, 189 Turning off Useful features 167


Average fuel consumption 192 Engine 55 Ashtrays and cigarette lighter 171
Compass 190 TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) 327 Cup holder 169
Country 193 Electrical outlet 173
U
Distance remaining 192 Garage door opener 183
Unlocking 32, 88
Language 193 Storage compartments 167
Centrally from inside 94
Selecting functions 189 Tele Aid* 174
Drivers door in an emergency 268
Setting date 189 Telephone* 173
Drivers door, fuel filler flap 89
Stop watch 192 Trip computer* 189
Fuel filler flap 219
Switching on 189
In an emergency 268 V
Trip odometer
Transmission selector lever Vehicle
Resetting 119
manually 270 Data recording 20
Trip odometer display 118
Vehicle in an emergency 182 Locking 28
Trunk see Cargo compartment
With the remote control 32 Locking in an emergency 269
Turn signal lamps
Upgrade signals Lowering 287
Replacing bulbs 274, 275
Tele Aid* 181 Proper use of 17
Turn signal, side marker lamp
Uphill driving Service battery 272
Replacing bulbs 274
Cruise control 154 Towing 293
Turn signals 50
Upholstery Unlocking 28
Additional in mirrors 274
Cleaning 245 Unlocking in an emergency 268
Cleaning lenses 242
Upshifting 121 Vehicle and trailer weights and
Front bulbs 274
ratings 212
Indicator lamps 25
Vehicle battery 272
Rear bulbs 275, 279

349
Index

Vehicle care Vehicle identification number (VIN) 304 Wheel change


Cup holder 244 Vehicle jack 265 Tightening torque 287
Engine cleaning 242 Vehicle lighting Wheels
Gear selector lever 244 Checking 221 Rotating 233
Hard plastic trim items 244 Vehicle tool kit 264 Window curtain airbags 64
Headlamps 242 Vehicle with CD-changer* 265 Windows see Side windows
Instrument cluster 244 Vehicle washing 242 Windshield
Leather upholstery 245 VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) 304, Defogging 140
Light alloy wheels 244 327 Refilling washer fluid 230
MB Tex upholstery 245 Voice control system* 327 Replacing wiper blades 283
Ornamental moldings 242 Washer fluid 230, 319
W
Paintwork 241 Washer system 319
Warning indicators
Parktronic* system sensor 243 Windshield washer fluid 319
Parktronic* 158
Plastic and rubber parts 245 Mixing ratio 319
Warning sounds
Power washer 241 Refilling 230
Drivers seat belts 64
Seat belts 244 Wiping with 51
Parking brake 49
Steering wheel 244 Windshield washer system 319
Warranty coverage 303
Tail lamps 242
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
Tar stains 241
Washing the vehicle 240
Turn signals 242
Wear pattern (tires) 233
Upholstery 245
Weights 311
Vehicle washing 242
Wheel bolt wrench 265
Window cleaning 243
Wiper blades 243

350
Index

Windshield wipers 51, 131 Wiper blades


Intermittent 51 Cleaning 243
Interval wiping 132 Installing 283
Normal wiper speed 51 Removing 283
Rain sensor* 132 Replacing 283
Rear window wiper/washer 52 Wiper switch 51
Replacing wiper blades 283 Wiper/washer
Simultaneous wiping and washing 52 Rear window 52
Single wipe 51 Wiping
Switching on 51 And washing simultaneously 51
Wiping with windshield washer Intermittent 51, 132
fluid 51 With windshield washer fluid 51
Winter driving Wiping and washing simultaneously 52
Snow chains 236
X
Tires 235
Xenon headlamps*
Winter driving instructions 202
Bi-Xenon* 323
Winter tires 235

351
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For
expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.

Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operators Manual.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.01-2273-31
Press time 02/16/04
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany